223
A CONCISE GUIDE TO MACRO ECONOMICS HARVARD BUSINESS REVIEW PRESS DAVID A. MOSS What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know Second Edition

A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

  • Upload
    others

  • View
    3

  • Download
    0

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

UNDERSTANDING THE GROUND RULES FOR THE GLOBAL ECONOMY

n this revised and updated edition of A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics, David A. Moss draws on his years of teaching at Harvard

Business School to explain important macro concepts using clear and engaging language.

This guidebook covers the essentials of macroeconomics and examines, in a simple and intuitive way, the core ideas of output, money, and expectations. Early chapters leave you with an understanding of everything from fiscal policy and central banking to business cycles and international trade. Later chapters provide a brief monetary history of the United States as well as the basics of macroeconomic accounting. You’ll learn why countries trade, why exchange rates move, and what makes an economy grow.

Moss’s detailed examples will arm you with a clear picture of how the economy works and how key variables impact business and will equip you to anticipate and respond to major macroeconomic events, such as a sudden depreciation of the real exchange rate or a steep hike in the federal funds rate.

Read this book from start to finish for a complete overview of macroeconomics, or use it as a reference when you’re confronted with specific challenges, like the need to make sense of monetary policy or to read a balance of payments statement. Either way, you’ll come away with a broad understanding of the subject and its key pieces, and you’ll be empowered to make smarter business decisions.STAY INFORMED. JOIN THE DISCUSSION.

VISIT HBR.ORG/BOOKS

FOLLOW @HARVARDBIZ ON TWITTER

FIND US ON FACEBOOK, LINKEDIN, YOUTUBE, AND GOOGLE+ HBR.ORG/BOOKS

ECONOMICS US$35.00 / CAN$40.50

Praise for A CONCISE GUIDE TO MACROECONOMICS

“An incredibly clear and sophisticated introduction to macroeconomics.”

—RICHARD VIETOR, Senator John Heinz Professor of the Environment at Harvard Business School;

author of How Countries Compete

“Any critical observer of current debates about the state of the macro economy needs

a clear understanding of a half-dozen basic concepts, how they are measured, and how

they are connected. David Moss’s short, jargon-free book provides just that. It does not

tell you what should be done, but how to begin thinking about what should be done.”

—ROBERT SOLOW, Institute Professor Emeritus at the Massachusetts Institute of Technology;

Nobel Laureate in Economics

“An extraordinary pedagogical achievement. The tight focus on the macroeconomics

that are essential for understanding the business environment and the lucidity of the

writing make this an ideal text for business students and executives.”

—JULIO ROTEMBERG, William Ziegler Professor of Business Administration, Harvard Business School

DAVID A. MOSS is the John G. McLean Professor of Business Administration at Harvard Business School. He is the author of Socializing Security: Progressive-Era Economists and the Origins of American Social Policy and When All Else Fails: Government as the Ultimate Risk Manager, and is the founder of the Tobin Project, a nonprofit research organization.

ISBN-13: 978-1-62527-196-9

9 7 8 1 6 2 5 2 7 1 9 6 9

9 0 0 0 0

A CONCISE GUIDE TO

MACROECONOMICS

H A R VA R D B U S I N E S S R E V I E W P R E S S

DAVID A . MOSS

What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Second Edition

MOSS

EV

GE

NIA

EL

ISE

EV

A

I

A C

ON

CIS

E G

UID

E T

O

MA

CR

OE

CO

NO

MIC

S

SecondEdition

Page 2: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

A C O N C I S E G U I D E T O

Macroeconomics

Page 3: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

Page 4: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

A C O N C I S E G U I D E T O

MacroeconomicsWhat Managers, Executives, and

Students Need to Know

Second Edition

David A. Moss

Harvard Business Review Press

Boston, Massachusetts

Page 5: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

Copyright 2014 David A. MossAll rights reservedPrinted in the United States of America10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in or introduced into a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form, or by any means (electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise), without the prior permis-sion of the publisher. Requests for permission should be directed to permissions @hbsp.harvard.edu, or mailed to Permissions, Harvard Business School Publishing, 60 Harvard Way, Boston, Massachusetts 02163.

The web addresses referenced in this book were live and correct at the time of the book’s publication but may be subject to change.

Cataloging-in-Publication data forthcoming.

eISBN: 9781625271976

The paper used in this publication meets the minimum requirements of the American National Standard for Permanence of Paper for Publications and Documents in Libraries and Archives Z39.48-1992.

HBR Press Quantity Sales Discounts

Harvard Business Review Press titles are available at significant quantity

discounts when purchased in bulk for client gifts, sales promotions, and

premiums. Special editions, including books with corporate logos, cus-

tomized covers, and letters from the company or CEO printed in the front

matter, as well as excerpts of existing books, can also be created in large

quantities for special needs.

For details and discount information for both print and ebook formats,

contact [email protected], tel. 800-988-0886, or www.hbr.

org/bulksales.

Page 6: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

For my students

Page 7: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

Page 8: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

C O N T E N T S

Acknowledgements ix

Introduction 1

Part I Understanding the Macro Economy

1 Output 7

Measuring National Output 8

Exchange of Output across Countries 11

What Makes Output Go Up and Down? 18

Isn’t Wealth More Important Than Output? 27

2 Money 33

Money and Its Effect on Interest Rates, Exchange Rates,

and Inflation 34

Nominal versus Real 39

Money and Banking 55

The Art and Science of Central Banking 58

3 Expectations 67

Expectations and Inflation 68

Expectations and Output 73

Expectations and Other Macro Variables 83

Part II Selected Topics—Background and Mechanics

4 A Short History of Money and Monetary

Policy in the United States 89

Page 9: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Contents

viii

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

Defining the Unit of Account and the Price of Money 90

The Gold Standard: A Self-Regulating Mechanism? 91

The Creation of the Federal Reserve 93

Finding the Right Monetary Rule under a Floating

Exchange Rate 95

The Transformation of American Monetary Policy 98

5 The Fundamentals of GDP Accounting 101

Three Measurement Approaches 102

The Nuts and Bolts of the Expenditure Method 103

Depreciation 106

GDP versus GNP 107

Historical and Cross-Country Comparisons 108

Investment, Savings, and Foreign Borrowing 111

6 Reading a Balance of Payments Statement 117

A Typical Balance of Payments Statement 118

Understanding Credits and Debits 120

The Power and Pitfalls of BOP Accounting 124

7 Understanding Exchange Rates 131

The Current Account Balance 131

Inflation and Purchasing Power Parity 133

Interest Rates 134

Making Sense of Exchange Rates 135

Conclusion 139

Output 139

Money 140

Expectations 143

Uses and Misuses of Macroeconomics 146

Epilogue 149

Glossary 159

Notes 183

Index 191

About the Author 211

Page 10: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

ix

A C K N O W L E D G M E N T S

This volume began as a note on macroeconomics for my

students, and I am deeply indebted to them and to my colleagues

in the Business, Government, and the International Economy

(BGIE) unit at Harvard Business School for encouraging me to

turn the note into a book. I am particularly grateful to Julio

Rotemberg, Dick Vietor, and Lou Wells for reading and com-

menting on the entire manuscript, and to Alex Dyck, Walter

Friedman, Lakshmi Iyer, Andrew Novo, Huw Pill, Mitch Weiss,

and Jim Wooten for providing vital feedback along the way, and

to all my BGIE colleagues over the years, from whom I have

learned so much about macroeconomics and how to teach it.

Jeff Kehoe, my editor at Harvard Business Review Press, was

extraordinarily supportive at every stage, and offered superb

advice on how to recast the original note for a broader audience.

Chapter 5, on GDP accounting, draws heavily on a Harvard

Business School case entitled “National Economic Accounting:

Past, Present, and Future,” which I coauthored with Sarah

Brennan. Most of what I know about the intricacies of GDP

accounting I learned working with Sarah, and I remain exceed-

ingly grateful to her for her commitment to that project and for

being such a terrific researcher, coauthor, and friend.

In preparing this second edition, Jonathan Schlefer played a

tremendous role, particularly in helping to update data through-

out the volume and in clarifying the IMF’s new approach to bal-

ance of payments accounting. He did a masterful job, and I am

Page 11: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Acknowledgments

x

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

enormously appreciative of his contributions, without which

there would be no second edition.

Finally, I wish to thank my parents, who, in so many ways,

inspired this book by teaching me not to lose sight of the big

picture; and my wife and daughters—Abby, Julia, and Emily—

for their unending support and patience and for making every

day so much fun!

Page 12: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

1

Introduction

Macroeconomic forces affect all of us in our daily lives. Inflation

rates influence the prices we pay for goods and services and, in

turn, the value of our incomes and our savings. Interest rates

determine the cost of borrowing and the yield on bank accounts

and bonds, while exchange rates affect our command over

foreign products as well as the value of our foreign assets. And all

of this represents just the tip of the iceberg. Numerous macro

variables—ranging from unemployment to productivity—are

equally important in shaping the economic environment in

which we live.

For most business managers, a basic understanding of macro-

economics allows a more complete—as well as a more

nuanced—conception of market conditions, on both the demand

side and the supply side. It also ensures that they are better

Introduction.indd 1 19/05/14 11:56 PM

Page 13: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Introduction

2

equipped to anticipate and to respond to major macroeconomic

events, such as a sudden depreciation of the real exchange rate

or steep hike in the federal funds rate.

Although managers can enjoy success even if they don’t truly

understand these sorts of macro variables, they have the poten-

tial to outperform their competitors—to see hidden opportuni-

ties and to avoid unnecessary (and sometimes very costly)

mistakes—after incorporating basic macro concepts and rela-

tionships into their management toolbox. In the 1990s, for

example, managers who knew how to read and interpret a bal-

ance of payments statement had a definite leg up in dealing with

the Mexican and Asian currency crises. Similarly, those who

understood the essential dynamic of a bank run—and the power

of negative expectations—were better positioned to cope with

the financial crisis of 2007–2009.

Nor is the practical value of macroeconomics confined to

business. A basic understanding of the subject is important to us

as consumers, as workers, as investors, and even as voters.

Whether our elected officials (and the individuals they appoint

to lead crucial agencies, such as the Federal Reserve and the

Treasury Department) manage the macro economy well or poorly

obviously has great significance for our quality of life, both now

and in the future. Whether a large budget deficit is advantageous

or disadvantageous at a particular moment in time is something

that voters should be able to evaluate for themselves.

Unfortunately, even many well-educated citizens have never

studied macroeconomics. And those who have studied the sub-

ject too often learned more about how to solve artificial problem

sets than about the true fundamentals of the macro economy.

Macroeconomics is frequently taught with a heavy focus on

equations and graphs, which, for many students, obscure the

essential ideas and intuition that make the subject meaningful.

Introduction.indd 2 19/05/14 11:56 PM

Page 14: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Introduction

3

This book attempts to provide a conceptual overview of

macroeconomics, emphasizing essential principles and relation-

ships, rather than mathematical models and formulas. The pur-

pose is to convey the fundamentals—the building blocks—and

to do so in a way that is both accessible and relevant.

The approach employed here is one I have helped to develop

over the past two decades at Harvard Business School. In fact,

I drafted the first version of this book as a primer for my stu-

dents, and it has since been adopted as required reading in many

programs at HBS. Although the approach is quite different from

what one would find in a standard macro textbook (graduate or

undergraduate), it is an approach that we have found to be very

effective and that has also been well received by students and

executives alike.

As the remainder of this volume makes clear, macroeconomics

may be thought of as resting on three basic pillars: output,

money, and expectations. Because output is the central pillar, we

begin with that topic in chapter 1 and follow with money and

expectations in chapters 2 and 3, respectively. Together, chapters

1 through 3 comprise part I of the book, which covers the funda-

mentals of macroeconomics in as compact a form as possible.

For readers interested in digging a bit deeper, chapters 4

through 7 (part II) provide more detailed coverage in several key

areas. These chapters are not meant to be comprehensive, but

rather to address a handful of macro topics that typically pro-

voke the most questions in the classroom. Chapter 4 provides a

brief historical survey of US monetary policy, tracing manage-

ment of the nation’s money supply from the dawn of the republic

down to the present. Experience suggests that a historical

approach proves particularly effective in conveying both the

logic and limits of monetary policy and central banking.

Chapters 5 and 6 cover the basics of macroeconomic accounting.

Introduction.indd 3 19/05/14 11:56 PM

Page 15: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Introduction

4

Just as knowledge of how to read an income statement and a

balance sheet is essential for assessing a company, knowledge of

how to read a GDP account (chapter 5) and a balance of pay-

ments statement (chapter 6) is essential for assessing a country

and the performance of its economy. Finally, chapter 7 surveys

the topic of exchange rates, focusing on factors that are thought

to drive currencies to appreciate or depreciate. Although the

path of an exchange rate, like the trajectory of a stock, is notori-

ously difficult to predict, there are certainly a number of impor-

tant economic relationships one should take into account

when—for either personal or business reasons—a prediction is

required.

Unlike a standard textbook, this volume is designed to be read

in just a few sittings. Although readers may wish to return to

particular sections from time to time (to brush up on exchange

rates or fiscal policy, for example), they are likely to get the most

out of the book if they first read it (or at least read part I) in its

entirety—the goal being to develop a broad understanding of the

subject, its key pieces, and how they fit together.

With that in mind, we begin at the conceptual heart of

macroeconomics, with an exploration of national output in

chapter 1.

Introduction.indd 4 19/05/14 11:56 PM

Page 16: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

I

Understanding the

Macro Economy

Ch01.indd 5 19/05/14 11:16 PM

Page 17: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Ch01.indd 6 19/05/14 11:16 PM

Page 18: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

7

C h a p t E r O N E

Output

The notion of national output lies at the heart of macroeconomics.

The total amount of output (goods and services) that a country

produces constitutes its ultimate budget constraint. A country

can use more output than it produces only if it borrows the dif-

ference from foreigners. Large volumes of output—not large

quantities of money—are what make nations prosperous.

A national government could print and distribute all the money

it wanted, turning all of its residents into millionaires. But col-

lectively they would be no better off than before unless national

output increased as well. And even with all that money, they

would find themselves worse off if national output declined.

Ch01.indd 7 19/05/14 11:16 PM

Page 19: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Understanding the Macro Economy

8

Measuring National Output

The most widely accepted measure of national output is gross

domestic product (GDP). In order to understand what GDP is, it

is first necessary to figure out how it is measured.

The central challenge in measuring national output (GDP) is

to avoid counting the same output more than once. It might

seem obvious that total output should simply equal the value of

all the goods and services produced in an economy—every

pound of steel, every tractor, every bushel of grain, every loaf of

bread, every meal sold at a restaurant, every piece of paper, every

architectural blueprint, every building constructed, and so forth.

But this isn’t quite right, because counting every good and ser-

vice actually ends up counting the same output again and again,

at multiple stages of production.

A simple example illustrates this problem. Imagine that

Company A, a forestry company, cuts trees in a forest it owns

and sells the wood to Company B for $1,000. Company B, a fur-

niture company, cuts and sands the wood and fashions it into

tables and chairs, which it then sells to a retailer, Company C, for

$2,500. Company C ultimately sells the tables and chairs to con-

sumers for $3,000. If, in calculating total output, one added up

the sales price of every transaction ($1,000 + $2,500 + $3,000),

the result ($6,500) would overstate the amount of output

because it would count the value of the lumber three times (in all

three transactions) and the value of the carpentry twice (in the

final two).

A good way to avoid the over-counting problem is to focus

on the value added—that is, the new output created—at each

stage of production. If a tailor bought an unfinished shirt for

$50, sewed on buttons costing $1, and then sold the finished

Ch01.indd 8 19/05/14 11:16 PM

Page 20: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Output

9

shirt for $60, we would not say that he created $60 worth of

output. Rather, he added $9 of value to the unfinished shirt

and buttons, and thus created $9 worth of output. More pre-

cisely, value added (or output created) equals the sales price of

a good or service minus the cost of all nonlabor inputs used to

produce it.

We can easily apply this method to the A-B-C example just

given. Because Company A sold the raw wood it had cut for

$1,000, and had purchased no material inputs, it added $1,000

of value (output) to the economy. Company B added another

$1,500 in value, since it paid $1,000 for inputs (from

Company A) and sold its output (to Company C) for $2,500.

Finally, Company C added another $500 in value, having pur-

chased $2,500 in inputs (from Company B) and sold $3,000

worth of final output to consumers. If one sums the value added

at each stage ($1,000 + $1,500 + $500), one finds that a total of

$3,000 worth of output was created.

Another—and far simpler—way to avoid the over-counting

problem is to focus exclusively on final sales, which implicitly

account for the output created in all prior stages of production.

Since consumers paid Company C, the retailer, $3,000 for the

final tables and chairs, we can conclude that $3,000 worth of

total output was created. Note that this was precisely the same

answer we came to using the value-added approach in the previ-

ous paragraph. (See figure 1-1.)

Although both methods are correct, the second method—

known as the expenditure method—has emerged as the stan-

dard approach for calculating GDP in most countries. The

essential logic of the expenditure method is that if we add up all

expenditures on final goods and services, then that sum must

exactly equal the total value of national output produced, since

every piece of output must eventually be purchased in one way

Ch01.indd 9 19/05/14 11:16 PM

Page 21: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Understanding the Macro Economy

10

or another.1 As a result, the standard definition of GDP is the market

value of all final goods and services produced within a country over a

given year.

Government officials typically divide expenditure on final

goods and services into five categories: consumption by house-

holds (C), investment in productive assets (I), government

spending on goods and services (G), exports (EX), and imports

(IM). One can find precise definitions for these categories in

chapter 5.

The most important thing to remember, however, is that all

of these categories are designed to avoid double counting.

Although consumption includes almost all spending by house-

holds, business investment does not include all spending by

firms. If it did, we would end up with massive double count-

ing, because many of the things firms buy (such as raw materi-

als) are ultimately processed and resold to consumers. As a

result, investment only includes expenditures on output that

is not expected to be used up in the short run (typically a

year). For a carpenter, a new electric saw would represent

investment, whereas the lumber that he buys to turn into

tables and chairs would not.2

Government officials typically divide expenditure on final

goods and services into five categories: consumption by house-

holds (C), investment in productive assets (I), government spend-

ing on goods and services (G), exports (EX), and imports (IM).

One can find precise definitions for these categories in chapter 5.

The most important thing to remember, however, is that all of

these categories are designed to avoid double counting. Although

consumption includes almost all spending by households, busi-

ness investment does not include all spending by firms. If it did,

we would end up with massive double counting, because many

of the things firms buy (such as raw materials) are ultimately

processed and resold to consumers. As a result, investment only

includes expenditures on output that is not expected to be used

up in the short run (typically a year). For a carpenter, a new elec-

tric saw would represent investment, whereas the lumber that he

buys to turn into tables and chairs would not.2

Another possible source of over-counting (in the expenditure

method) involves imports. If American consumers bought tele-

visions from Asia, we would have to be careful not to count those

Understanding the Macro Economy

10

F IGU R E 1 -1

Calculating total output: an example

Sales price – Cost of material inputs = Value added

Company A $1,000 $0 $1,000(forestry company)

↓Company B $2,500 $1,000 $1,500(furniture company)

↓Company C $3,000 $2,500 $500(retailer, to consumer)

Total $6,500 $3,500 $3,000

Moss_01_1to32 4/12/07 1:48 PM Page 10

Ch01.indd 10 19/05/14 11:16 PM

Page 22: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Output

11

Another possible source of over-counting (in the expenditure

method) involves imports. If American consumers bought televi-

sions from Asia, we would have to be careful not to count those

consumer expenditures in American GDP, since the output being

purchased was foreign, not domestic. For this reason, imports

are subtracted from total expenditures and thus appropriately

excluded from GDP.

Putting these various pieces together yields one of the most

important identities in macroeconomics:

National Output (GDP) = C + I + G + EX – IM.

This tells us that national output equals total expenditure on

final goods and services, excluding imports. As we have seen,

national output also equals the sum of value added (i.e., the

incremental value added at every stage of production) through-

out the domestic economy.

A third way to measure total output is to focus on income

(though again, in practice, the expenditure method is used more

often in calculating GDP). Income is the amount paid to factors

of production, labor and capital, for their services—typically in

the form of wages, salaries, interest, dividends, rent, and royal-

ties. Since income is just payment for the production of output,

it makes sense that total income should ultimately equal total

output. After all, all of the proceeds of production ultimately

have to end up somewhere, including in your pocket and mine.3

Exchange of Output across Countries

Sometimes, one country may wish to exchange its output for

that of another country. For example, the United States may

wish to exchange commercial aircraft (such as Boeing 747s)

Ch01.indd 11 19/05/14 11:16 PM

Page 23: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Understanding the Macro Economy

12

for Japanese automobiles (such as Hondas or Toyotas). If the

value of the US aircraft exactly equaled the value of the

Japanese automobiles at the moment of exchange, then both

countries’ trade accounts would be in balance. That is, exports

would exactly equal imports in both the United States and

Japan.

One puzzle is why any country would want to run a trade

surplus, which involves giving more of its output away to for-

eigners (in the form of exports) than it receives in return (in the

form of imports). Why would any country wish to give away

more than it received? The answer, in a nutshell, is that countries

running trade surpluses today expect to get back additional out-

put from their trading partners in the future.4 This transfer across

time is ensured through international lending and borrowing.

When a country exports more than it imports, it inevitably lends

an equivalent amount of funds abroad, which allows the foreign-

ers to purchase its surplus production. Conversely, when a

country imports more than it exports, it must borrow from for-

eigners to finance the difference. By borrowing, it is promising to

pay back the difference—typically with interest—at some point

in the future.

If, for instance, the United States were to import automobiles

from Japan without exporting anything in return, it could pay

for these automobiles only by borrowing from Japan. This bor-

rowing could take many different forms: Americans could bor-

row directly from Japanese banks or they could give the Japanese

stocks or bonds or other securities. Whatever form the borrow-

ing took, the Japanese would end up with assets, such as stocks

or bonds, promising a claim on future US output. Eventually,

when the Japanese decided to sell their American stocks and

bonds and use the proceeds to buy American airplanes, movies,

and software, the trade balances of the two countries would flip.

Ch01.indd 12 19/05/14 11:16 PM

Page 24: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Output

13

Now the United States would be required to run a trade surplus,

shipping some of its output to Japan, and thus forcing Americans

to consume less than they produced. The Japanese, meanwhile,

would now run a trade deficit, permitting their consumption to

exceed their production (with the difference coming from the

United States).

All international transactions of this sort are recorded in a

country’s balance of payments (BOP) statement. (See table 1-1.)

Current transactions, such as exports and imports of goods and

services, are recorded in the current account. Financial transac-

tions, including sales of stocks and bonds to foreigners, are

recorded in the financial account (which was formerly called the

capital account). Deficits on the current account are necessarily

accompanied by capital inflows (borrowing) on the financial

account, whereas surpluses on the current account are accompa-

nied by capital outflows (lending) on the financial account. As a

result, the current account and the financial account are perfect

opposites, with a deficit in one necessarily accompanied by a

surplus of the same amount in the other. (For pointers on read-

ing a BOP statement, see chapter 6.)

Current account deficits should not necessarily be interpreted

in a negative light, since they can indicate either weakness or

strength, depending on the context. In some cases, current

account deficits imply that a country is living beyond its means,

increasing its consumption to an unsustainable level. But current

account deficits can also arise when a country is borrowing from

abroad in order to raise its level of domestic investment (and

thus increase its future output). The question for deficit coun-

tries, therefore, is whether they are using the additional output

well, whereas for surplus countries it is whether they can expect

a good return in the future on the output they are giving to oth-

ers today.

Ch01.indd 13 19/05/14 11:16 PM

Page 25: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Understanding the Macro Economy

14

Although balance of payments accounting may be unfamil-

iar to you, it is not really as difficult as it may seem. In fact, the

fundamental issues should become a good deal clearer through

a simple analogy to your own personal budget. The amount of

output that you produce—that is, your individual output—is

reflected in your personal income. If you are employed, you

are paid wages or a salary for your contribution to output. If

you own capital (such as bank accounts, bonds, or stocks),

you are paid interest or dividends for its contribution to out-

put. If you wish to spend more than you produce (i.e., to buy

TABLE 1-1

GDP and the balance of payments—a hypothetical example

GDP accounts for Country X, 2010 (millions of $)

Balance of payments for Country X, 2010 (millions of $)

Consumption (C) 1,000Investment (I) 200Government (G) 300Exports (EX) 500Imports (IM) 550

Current account −50balance on merchandise −200balance on services 150net investment income −25unilateral transfers 25

GDP (C + I + G + EX – IM) 1,450 Financial account 50net direct investment −125net portfolio investment 150errors and omissions −25change in official reserves 50

Explanation: In this example, Country X is buying more final output than it produces. We know this because C + I + G (domestic expenditure) is greater than total GDP (1,500 vs. 1,450). For this to be possible, Country X must import more than it exports, as is indeed the case. As shown in the left panel, imports (of goods and services) exceed exports (of goods and services) by 50, which is exactly the amount by which domestic expenditure exceeds domestic output. Clearly the difference between domestic expenditure and domestic output is being imported from abroad. The panel on the right side, the balance of payments, offers a more detailed account of Country X’s transactions with the rest of the world. The current account is in deficit, reflecting the fact that Country X buys more from foreigners than it sells to foreigners. (Although the current account on the BOP does not always equal the difference between exports and imports as recorded in the GDP accounts, it is often close.) The surplus on the financial account represents a net capital inflow from abroad, which is necessary to finance the deficit on the current account. The capital inflows that make up the financial account take a variety of forms, including foreign direct investment (FDI), portfolio flows, and so on. For a more detailed treatment of GDP accounting and balance of payments accounting, see chapters 5 and 6.

Ch01.indd 14 19/05/14 11:16 PM

Page 26: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Output

15

more than your total income permits), then you have to bor-

row (or at least draw down your savings) to finance the differ-

ence. This excess spending may be used to finance increased

consumption (such as a two-week holiday in Europe) or a new

personal investment (such as additional education or an entre-

preneurial venture) that promises to increase your earning

power in the future. Either way, for you to borrow, someone

else has to lend, which in turn means that that person is pro-

ducing more than he or she is spending (and saving the differ-

ence so it can be lent to you). Someday you will have to repay

the loan, presumably with interest. When you do that, you

will have to consume less than you produce (i.e., consume less

than your income would otherwise permit) because you will

have to turn over part of your income to your creditor in the

form of interest and principal repayments.

For a country, it is basically the same thing. If a nation is

running a deficit on its current account (by importing more

than it exports, for example), then it is using more output than

it is producing, and it is borrowing the difference from for-

eigners, which registers as a surplus—a capital inflow—on the

financial account of its BOP statement. The key point is that

for a country, as for a person, the long-term constraint on con-

sumption and investment is the amount of output that can be

produced. A country, like a person, can use more output than

it produces in the short run (by financing the difference

through borrowing) but not over the long run. A nation’s

output—its GDP—thus represents its ultimate budget con-

straint, which is why the notion of national output lies at the

heart of macroeconomics. (On the relationship between out-

put and trade, see “A Brief Aside on the Theory of Comparative

Advantage.”)

Ch01.indd 15 19/05/14 11:16 PM

Page 27: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Understanding the Macro Economy

16

A Brief Aside on the Theory of Comparative Advantage

One of the most important principles in all of economics is

that of comparative advantage, first articulated by the

British political economist David Ricardo in 1817. Intent on per-

suading British lawmakers to abandon their protectionist trade

policies, Ricardo set out to prove the extraordinary power of trade

to increase total world output and thus consumption and living

standards. On the basis of a simple model with just two countries

and two goods, he showed that every country—even one enjoy-

ing an absolute productivity advantage in both goods—would

benefit from specializing in what it was relatively best at produc-

ing and then engaging in trade for everything else.

In his now-famous example, Ricardo imagined that Portugal

was more productive than England in making both wine and

cloth. Specifically, he assumed the Portuguese could produce,

over a year, a particular quantity of wine (say, 8,000 gallons) with

just 80 men, as compared with 120 men in England; and, simi-

larly, that the Portuguese could produce a particular quantity of

cloth (say, 9,000 yards) with just 90 men, as compared with

100 men in England. In other words, Portugal’s productivity was

100 gallons of wine or 100 yards of cloth per worker per year,

whereas England’s was only 66.67 gallons of wine or 90 yards of

cloth per worker per year. Given Portugal’s absolute advantage in

both industries, why would the Portuguese ever choose to buy

either wine or cloth from England?

Ricardo’s surprising answer was that both countries would

benefit from trade, so long as both specialized in what they were

relatively best at producing. In Ricardo’s example, although

Ch01.indd 16 19/05/14 11:16 PM

Page 28: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Output

17

Portugal was better at making both wine and cloth, its advantage

was greater in wine. As a result, Portugal enjoyed a comparative

advantage in wine, and, conversely, England enjoyed a compara-

tive advantage in cloth. Ricardo concluded that if each country

followed its comparative advantage—with Portugal producing

only wine and England only cloth—and the two then engaged in

trade with one another, each would be able to consume more

wine and more cloth than if it had tried to produce both goods

on its own.

To make this more concrete, assume that each country had

1,200 workers, and that each allocated 700 to wine and 500

to cloth. This would mean that Portugal produced 70,000 gal-

lons of wine and 50,000 yards of cloth, whereas England pro-

duced 46,667 gallons of wine and 45,000 yards of cloth.

However, if each country devoted all 1,200 workers to its com-

parative advantage, Portugal would produce 120,000 gallons

of wine and England 108,000 yards of cloth. If they now

traded, say, 48,000 gallons of wine for 55,000 yards of cloth,

Portugal would end up with 72,000 gallons of wine and

55,000 yards of cloth, and England with 48,000 gallons of

wine and 53,000 yards of cloth. Both countries, in other words,

would end up with more of both goods as a result of special-

izing and trading. (See table 1-2.) In fact, to have produced

these quantities on their own would have required 1,270 work-

ers in Portugal and 1,309 workers in England. It is as if, as a

result of specializing and trading according to the principle of

comparative advantage, both countries got the output of many

extra workers for free.

Economists have since shown that Ricardo’s result can be gen-

eralized to as many countries and to as many goods as one wants

to include. Although we can certainly specify conditions under

Ch01.indd 17 19/05/14 11:16 PM

Page 29: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Understanding the Macro Economy

18

What Makes Output Go Up and Down?

Many macroeconomists regard the question of what makes

national output go up and down as the most important question

of all. Although there is remarkably little agreement on the answer,

there are at least a few things on which most economists do agree.

which mutual gains from trade break down, most economists

tend to believe that these conditions—these possible exceptions

to free trade—occur relatively rarely in practice. Indeed, the Nobel

TABLE 1-2

Comparative advantage and gains from trade: a numeric example

Wine (gallons)

Cloth (yards)

Portuguese productivity (output per worker per year) 100 100

English productivity (output per worker per year) 66.67 90

Ratio of Portuguese productivity to English productivity

1.5 (Portuguese comparative

average)

1.1 (English

comparative average)

Portuguese output under autarchy (700 wine workers, 500 cloth workers) 70,000 50,000

English output under autarchy (700 wine workers, 500 cloth workers) 46,667 45,000

Portuguese output under specialization (1,200 wine workers) 120,000 0

English output under specialization (1,200 cloth workers) 0 108,000

Portuguese consumption after trade (e.g., 48,000 gallons of wine for 55,000 yards of cloth 72,000 55,000

English consumption after trade (e.g., 55,000 yards of cloth for 48,000 gallons of wine) 48,000 53,000

Ch01.indd 18 19/05/14 11:16 PM

Page 30: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Output

19

Prize-winning economist Paul Samuelson once acknowledged

that “it is a simplified theory. Yet, for all its oversimplification, the

theory of comparative advantage provides a most important

glimpse of truth. Political economy has found few more pregnant

principles. A nation that neglects comparative advantage may pay

a heavy price in terms of living standards and growth.”

Remarkably, most of us—even those who have never studied

the theory of comparative advantage—tend to live by it in our own

personal affairs every day. For the most part, we all try to do what

we’re relatively best at and trade for everything else. Take an

investment banker, for example. Even if that investment banker

were better at painting houses than any professional painter in

town, she would still probably be wise (from an economic stand-

point) to focus on investment banking and to pay others to paint

her house for her, rather than to paint it herself. This is because

her comparative advantage is presumably in investment banking,

not house painting. Taking time away from her high-paying invest-

ment banking job in order to paint her house would likely prove

quite costly, ultimately reducing the amount of money she could

earn and, in turn, the amount of output she could consume. In

order to maximize output, in other words, it makes sense for each

of us to specialize in our comparative advantage and to trade for

the rest.

Sources of Growth

Beginning with the question of what makes output rise over

time, economists often point to three basic sources of economic

growth: increases in labor, increases in capital, and increases in

the efficiency with which these two factors are used. The

amount of labor can rise if existing workers work longer hours

Ch01.indd 19 19/05/14 11:16 PM

Page 31: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Understanding the Macro Economy

20

or if the workforce is expanded through new entrants (such as

occurred in the United States in the 1970s, when previously

nonemployed women began entering the paid workforce in

large numbers). Capital stock rises when businesses enhance

their productive capacity by adding more plant and equipment

(through investment). Efficiency increases when producers are

able to get more output from the same amount of labor and

capital—as a result of organizational innovation, for example.

As an illustration of these different sources of growth, consider

a simple textile factory with 10 employees and 10 sewing

machines. If each employee, making whole shirts on a sewing

machine, were able to produce 10 shirts per day, then the total

output of the factory would be 100 shirts per day. Now imagine

that the factory owner doubled both the number of workers and

the number of sewing machines. Output would undoubtedly

rise—perhaps to 200 shirts per day. Thus, one strategy for increas-

ing output is to increase labor, capital, or a combination of the

two. A very different strategy, however, would aim for an increase

in efficiency, rather than labor and capital inputs. The factory

owner, for example, might try to enhance efficiency by reorganiz-

ing the shop floor, setting up something resembling an assembly

line. Under the new arrangement, instead of each worker making

whole shirts, some workers would make collars, others sleeves,

and so on. Workers at the end of the line would assemble the

various pieces. If this approach were substantially more efficient,

the factory—with its original 10 workers and 10 sewing

machines—might now be able to produce as many as 200 shirts

per day, or more, even with no increase in labor or capital.5

Economists often refer to such efficiency as total factor productiv-

ity (or TFP). (For further discussion of TFP, see “Productivity.”)

Ch01.indd 20 19/05/14 11:16 PM

Page 32: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Output

21

Although the illustration just given involved but a single

factory, the same basic principles can be applied to entire econ-

omies. A national economy may increase its GDP by increasing

the total number of person-hours worked (labor), by increasing

the total amount of plant and equipment in use (capital), or by

increasing the efficiency with which labor and capital are used

(TFP).

So-called supply-side economists focus their attention on

how to grow all three of these factors, in order to increase the

total potential output—the supply side—of an economy. One

favorite method among “supply-siders” in the United States is

the reduction of tax rates. Supply-side economists argue that

because lower tax rates allow everyone in the private sector to

keep more of what they earn, tax relief provides citizens with

strong incentives to work longer hours (thus increasing labor),

to save and invest more of their income (thus increasing capi-

tal), and to devote more attention to innovation of all kinds

(thus increasing efficiency, or TFP). For all of these reasons,

supply-siders in the United States have often favored reduc-

tions in tax rates as the best way to grow GDP over the

long run.

Other economists, including many outside of the United

States, have at times argued almost exactly the opposite—that

government led investment (in public infrastructure, education,

and R&D, for example) can be the best way to build the capital

stock, enhance the labor force, and promote innovation and thus

the best way to boost long-run economic growth. Although they,

too, focus on the supply side, they have a very different concep-

tion of the optimal use of public policy in boosting potential out-

put (supply).

Ch01.indd 21 19/05/14 11:16 PM

Page 33: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Understanding the Macro Economy

22

Productivity

Although total factor productivity is an important macroeco-

nomic concept, it is not typically what economists and other

analysts have in mind when they refer simply to “productivity.”

Instead, the word is commonly used as shorthand for labor pro-

ductivity, defined as output per worker hour (or, in some cases, as

output per worker). If you read in the newspaper that hourly pro-

ductivity increased by 3 percent last year, this means that real

GDP (output) divided by the total number of hours worked

nationwide was 3 percent higher at the end of last year than it

was at the end of the previous year. In general, countries with

high labor productivity enjoy higher wages and living standards

than countries with low labor productivity.

There are many reasons why labor productivity might be

higher in one country than another, or why it might grow in a

given country from one year to the next. In particular, greater

availability of machinery and other capital equipment is typically

associated with higher labor productivity. As one economist has

noted, “Railroad workers, on average, can each move more tons

Causes of Economic Downturns (recessions and Depressions)

Another question of great importance among macroeconomists

is what makes output decline or grow more slowly. Clearly, any-

thing that causes labor, capital, or TFP to fall could potentially

cause a decline in output, or at least a decline in its rate of

growth. A massive earthquake, for example, could reduce output

by destroying vast amounts of physical capital. Similarly, a deadly

Ch01.indd 22 19/05/14 11:16 PM

Page 34: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Output

23

of freight than the average bicyclist.”a Better educated workers

also tend to be more productive than their less educated

counterparts, with college-educated workers generally producing

more output per hour (and earning higher wages) than

high-school-educated workers.

Economic analysts often pay close attention to the relationship

between productivity and wages. When a country’s wages are

rising faster than its labor productivity, economists say that its unit

labor costs (i.e., the cost of labor needed to produce a unit of

output) are rising. When, conversely, increases in labor productiv-

ity outpace increases in wages, unit labor costs are said to be

falling. Countries whose unit labor costs (as measured in a com-

mon currency) are rising faster than those of their trade partners

are often said to be “losing competitiveness” in the global

marketplace.

a. Forest Reinhardt, “Accounting for Productivity Growth,” Case no. 794-051 (Boston: Harvard Business School, 1994): 3. When labor productivity rises by more than one would expect from an increase in the capital stock alone, econo-mists attribute the difference to total factor productivity, which broadly mea-sures the efficiency with which labor and capital are used.

epidemic could reduce output by decimating the labor force.

Even something as seemingly noneconomic as religious strife

could reduce output, by increasing tensions among employees of

different faiths and thus reducing their collective efficiency and,

in turn, TFP.

In some cases, however, output may decline sharply even in

the absence of any earthquakes or epidemics. From 1929 to

1933, for example, national output declined by more than

Ch01.indd 23 19/05/14 11:16 PM

Page 35: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Understanding the Macro Economy

24

30 percent in the United States. Economists and policy makers

alike were as puzzled as they were horrified. President Herbert

Hoover observed in October 1930 that although the economy

was in a depression, “the fundamental assets of the Nation…

have been unimpaired… The gigantic equipment and unparal-

leled organization for production and distribution are in many

parts even stronger than two years ago.”6 Similarly, in his

inaugural address in early 1933, President Franklin Roosevelt

maintained that “our distress comes from no failure of substance.

We are stricken by no plague of locusts… Plenty is at our door-

step, but a generous use of it languishes in the very sight of the

supply.”7 Since all the necessary inputs (labor and capital) were

there, why had output fallen so dramatically in just a few short

years?

The British economist John Maynard Keynes claimed to have

the answer. “If our poverty were due to earthquake or famine or

war—if we lacked material things and the resources to produce

them,” he wrote in 1933, “we could not expect to find the means

to prosperity except in hard work, abstinence, and invention. In

fact, our predicament is notoriously of another kind. It comes

from some failure in the immaterial devices of the mind…

Nothing is required, and nothing will avail, except a little clear

thinking.”8 His key insight, implied by the phrase “immaterial

devices of the mind,” was that the problem was mainly one of

expectations and psychology. For some reason, people had gotten

it into their heads that the economy was in trouble, and that belief

rapidly became self-fulfilling. Families decided that they had bet-

ter save more to prepare for the future. Seeing a drop in con-

sumption on the horizon, businesses decided to scale back both

investment and production, leading to layoffs, which reduced

workers’ incomes and thus exacerbated the drop in consumption.

Ch01.indd 24 19/05/14 11:16 PM

Page 36: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Output

25

Driven by nothing more than expectations, which Keynes

would later refer to as “animal spirits,” the economy had fallen

into a vicious downward spiral. Although the economy’s poten-

tial output remained large (since all the same factories were still

there and the same workers still available, if called upon),

actual output had collapsed as a result of a severe shortfall in

demand.

In principle, such a collapse could not have occurred had

prices been perfectly flexible and adjusted instantly to

reequilibrate supply and demand. For example, if wages had

fallen fast enough (and far enough) to reflect a reduced

demand for labor, all unemployed workers would quickly

have found new jobs, though admittedly at lower wages than

they had enjoyed before. The point is that even with sudden

changes in expectations, resources would never go to waste—

or remain unemployed—if the price mechanism worked

perfectly.

In practice, however, markets sometimes falter. For reasons

that are still not fully understood, prices can be rigid or sticky,

meaning that they don’t always adjust as quickly or as completely

as they should. As a result, a negative shock—including a sud-

den downturn in expectations—truly can drive an economy into

an extended recession, where real incomes decline and both

human and physical resources are left unemployed.

Starting around the time of Keynes, therefore, economists

began to realize that there was more to economic growth than

just the supply side. Demand mattered a great deal as well, par-

ticularly since it could sometimes fall short. In fact, over roughly

the next 40 years, it became an article of faith among leading

economists and government officials that it was the government’s

responsibility to “manage demand” through fiscal and monetary

Ch01.indd 25 19/05/14 11:16 PM

Page 37: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Understanding the Macro Economy

26

policy, so as to reduce the duration and the severity of economic

recessions and thus help stabilize the business cycle.* (Figure 1-2

charts the US business cycle.)

We will return to these topics in greater detail in chapter 3.

But for now it is worth remembering that actual output can fall

short of potential output when demand falters. Labor, capital,

and TFP are all very important, but so too are expectations.a

* Economists commonly distinguish between long-term (secular) trends and short-term (cyclical) fluctuations. Recessions, which tend to come and go, are generally regarded as cyclical phenomena. Although there is no universally accepted definition of a recession, one rule of thumb is that a recession involves at least two consecutive quarters of negative real GDP growth.

–15

–10

–5

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

1930 1940 1950 1960 1970 1980 1990 2000 2010

Real GDP (% annual change) Unemployment rate (%)

F IGURE 1-2

The US business cycle, 1930–2010

Sources: GPD growth: Bureau of Economic Analysis, Table 1.1.1. “Percent Change from Preceding Period in Real Gross Domestic Product,” revised May 30, 2013; unemployment for 1930–1944: Historical Statistics of the United States, Millennial Edition Online, edited by Susan B. Carter et al. (New York: Cambridge University Press, 2006), Table Ba470–477, “Labor force, employment, and unemployment: 1890–1990”; unemployment for 1945–2010: Bureau of Labor Statistics, Current Population Survey, “Employment status of the civilian noninstitutional population, 1942 to date,” accessed June 2013.

Ch01.indd 26 19/05/14 11:16 PM

Page 38: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Output

27

Isn’t Wealth More Important than Output?

With all this focus on output, even a loyal reader may be starting

to entertain some doubts. One might be wondering, for instance,

whether wealth isn’t more important than output in determining

a nation’s well-being. Although this is a very good question, the

answer, in a word, is “no.”

Unquestionably, people feel rich when they own lots of finan-

cial assets, such as stocks and bonds. But the reason they feel

rich is that these assets provide them, indirectly, with a claim on

future output. If they own stock in a company, for example, then

they are entitled to a share of its future profits, which are in turn

based on the output the company produces and sells. Another

way to look at this is that people who own lots of financial assets

feel rich because they believe they can always sell the assets for

money and use the proceeds to buy any goods and services their

hearts desire. In this sense as well, wealth simply represents a

claim on future output.9 Clearly, if the production of output col-

lapsed and there were few goods or services to buy (because of a

massive epidemic, for example), then most assets—including

stocks and bonds—would quickly lose much of their value, with

some even becoming worthless. Indeed, this is why financial

assets typically lose value in a depression, when output falls.

At root, most financial assets represent claims on real produc-

tive assets (such as plant and equipment), which in turn are

expected to generate output in the future. But of course, all of

these productive assets were once output themselves. One of the

most important decisions that a society has to make—at least

implicitly—is what to do with the output it produces. One option

is simply to consume all of it every year. The problem with focus-

ing solely on the present is that it may eliminate the chance for a

Ch01.indd 27 19/05/14 11:16 PM

Page 39: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

28

brighter future. Instead of consuming everything today, a better

strategy might be to save something for tomorrow. In fact, it

might be possible to produce far more output in the future if

some fraction of today’s resources were used to make productive

assets (such as the sewing machines needed to make clothes)

rather than just consumables (such as the clothes themselves).

Current output that is intended to increase future output is

called investment. Fundamentally, investment can be financed in

one of two ways—either through domestic savings (which

implies reduced consumption today) or through borrowing from

abroad (which implies reduced consumption tomorrow). In the

United States at the present time, Americans do some of

both. (See figure 1-3.)

Understanding the Macro Economy

Domestic expenditure (uses of output) Share of GDP (%)

Private and government consumptionPrivate and government investmentTotal

84 19 ¬103

Sources of investmentDomestic savingsNet borrowing from abroadTotal

16 3 19

Expenditure versus outputTotal domestic expenditureTotal domestic output (GDP)Difference (= net borrowing from abroad)

103100

® 3

Source: Bureau of Economic Analysis, US Department of Commerce.Note: In the United States in 2012, domestic expenditures (uses of output) exceeded domestic production of output (GDP) by about 3%. Similarly, total domestic investment exceeded total domestic savings—again by about 3% (19% investment minus 16% savings). In both cases, the difference was made up by “borrowing” 3% of output from abroad (as expressed in the current account deficit).

FIGURE 1- 3

Domestic expenditure, domestic output, and sources of investment in the United States, 2012

Ch01.indd 28 19/05/14 11:16 PM

Page 40: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

29

Output

In a market economy, decision making about savings and

investment is highly decentralized. Based on expected returns

and the cost of borrowing, as well as their own preferences,

households decide how much to save, firms decide how much to

invest, and foreigners decide how much to lend. In some cases,

the government may try to influence the result—by offering, for

example, an investment tax credit or other incentives to

encourage additional business expenditure on plant and equip-

ment. For the most part, however, these critical decisions are

made privately in the marketplace every single day, by house-

holds, firms, and foreign investors.

Ultimately, the output the market allocates to investment

(rather than to consumption) adds to the nation’s capital stock.

There is no question that capital is vital in a capitalist economy.

Hence the name. But it is equally important to remember that

capital is derived from output and, ultimately, that it is but a

means to an end—the end being to produce (and to have access

to) more output in the future. Indeed, a nation is generally

classified as rich or poor depending on its output per person

(GDP per capita), with the United States near the top of the list

($49,922 GDP per capita in 2012) and the Democratic Republic

of the Congo ($237) and Burundi ($282) near the bottom.10

(For more on the relationship between saving, investment, and

output, see “The Pension Dilemma and the Centrality of

Output.”)

Ch01.indd 29 19/05/14 11:16 PM

Page 41: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

30

The Pension Dilemma and the Centrality of Output

As is well known, many nations’ pay-as-you-go pension systems

are expected to run into trouble in the coming years. As the

baby boomers retire, each active worker paying into a national pen-

sion system will have to support an ever-larger number of retirees.

Although the debate over pension reform has become highly

contentious (and highly technical) in many countries, the essential

problem is really quite simple, and it boils down to output. Each

year, there is only so much national output to go around, and it

somehow has to be divided between active workers (who produce

it) and a growing number of retirees (who mainly just consume it).

This, at root, is the job of a pension system—to divide national out-

put between active workers and retirees. Keeping this simple point

in mind is helpful in thinking about the basic challenges ahead and

about the trade-offs involved in various reform proposals.

One proposed reform envisions the creation of new

government-sponsored individual retirement accounts (IRAs).

Whereas a pay-as-you-go pension system offers retirees an implicit

claim on labor (since benefits are generally financed through a

payroll tax on employment), a system based on IRAs would offer

retirees a claim on capital (as represented by the stocks and bonds

they held in their accounts). In other words, the pay-as-you-go

approach and the IRA approach simply offer two different ways to

divide the pie.

Unfortunately, some proponents of the IRA approach suggest

that there is a “free lunch” to be had: if only Americans could use

their Social Security contributions to buy stocks and bonds, rather

than to pay for the benefits of current retirees, they could build

nice nest eggs and comfortably retire without being a drain on

Understanding the Macro Economy

Ch01.indd 30 19/05/14 11:16 PM

Page 42: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Output

31

anyone. Current benefits, meanwhile, could be financed through

borrowing until the transition was complete.

Not surprisingly, this free lunch argument rests on several falla-

cies. One basic mistake is to treat a portfolio of stocks and bonds

as if it were a stockpile of actual output that an elderly person

could consume straightaway. Although all of us are accustomed

to thinking that we can sell our financial assets for cash at a

moment’s notice and then use the cash to buy goods and ser-

vices, this obviously wouldn’t work if everyone tried to do it at

once. If a large number of senior citizens liquidated their financial

assets at the same time, in order to buy needed goods and ser-

vices, they would soon find that the proceeds were much smaller

than they had expected. Simply giving the elderly more pieces of

paper—more stocks and bonds—does not guarantee that there

will be more output for them to consume in the future.

A related—but even more subtle—mistake is to view every con-

tribution to an IRA as an addition to national savings, which would

in turn raise national output in the future. The problem, once

again, is that stocks and bonds are just pieces of paper. They rep-

resent legal claims on productive assets, but are not productive

assets themselves. If every company in America decided to split

its stock, doubling the number of shares in every American’s port-

folio, this would obviously not increase national savings. As we

have seen, the only way to increase national savings at any

moment in time is to reduce national consumption, and thus to

devote more of the nation’s precious output to investment in pro-

ductive assets in order to raise output in the future. Whether or

not IRAs would contribute to national savings depends entirely on

how they were financed. If individuals or the government financed

contributions to the new IRAs through borrowing, for example,

then total savings would fail to rise as a result. To increase savings

Ch01.indd 31 19/05/14 11:16 PM

Page 43: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Understanding the Macro Economy

32

through the pension system, either current workers would have to

put more of their income aside each year, or current retirees

would have to accept lower benefits. Unfortunately, there’s no

free lunch.

The key question from a macroeconomic standpoint, there-

fore, is not whether the senior citizens of tomorrow have IRAs or

traditional Social Security benefits, but whether they (or others)

reduced their consumption to prepare for their eventual retire-

ment. Unless savings are increased today, the division of output

between active workers and retirees will be no less onerous

tomorrow, regardless of whether we have a fully funded pension

system based on individual accounts or a traditional pay-as-you-

go system based on payroll taxes.

If this seems surprising—or even confusing—don’t worry. The

impending pension crisis is one of the toughest problems facing

policy makers all around the world. But the underlying problem is

more straightforward than it seems. The amount of output a coun-

try produces is its ultimate budget constraint, regardless of how

many stocks or bonds or Social Security cards may be floating

around. Unless its output grows, a country cannot give more to its

retirees without giving less to its workers. The key point to remem-

ber is that as a society, it is mainly output, not wealth (and espe-

cially not financial wealth), that we have to rely on in the end.

Understanding the Macro Economy

Ch01.indd 32 19/05/14 11:16 PM

Page 44: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

33

C H A P T E R T W O

Money

Although output is more important than wealth in the study of

macroeconomics, one particular form of wealth—money—

occupies a very special place in the field. Money serves many

purposes in a market economy, but one of the most vital is to

facilitate exchange. Without money, the exchange of goods and

services would be far less efficient. As the British philosopher

David Hume put it in the middle of the eighteenth century,

money is not one “of the wheels of trade: It is the oil which ren-

ders the motion of the wheels more smooth and easy.”1

Just imagine how complicated trade could become in the

absence of money. If you were a farmer who grew wheat and

wanted to take your family out to dinner, you would have to find

a restaurant willing to accept a few bushels in exchange for a

meal. Otherwise, you would have to figure out what the

Page 45: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Understanding the Macro Economy

34

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

restaurant owner wanted—say, new chairs—and then find a

furniture maker who was willing to trade chairs for wheat. And

think what would happen if the furniture maker wasn’t inter-

ested in wheat, but wanted a new hammer instead.

Clearly, having one convenient commodity that everyone was

willing (or required) to accept as payment would simplify the

process immensely. And this is precisely why money is used as a

medium of exchange in every market economy around the

world. In a monetized economy (where people transact with

money), anyone wishing to purchase your wheat would simply

pay money for it, allowing you to buy a meal at a restaurant or

anything else you might want, subject solely to your having

enough money to cover the cost.

At least since the dawn of the nation state, national govern-

ments have taken charge of defining what money is in their econ-

omies (see chapter 4). Eventually, almost every national

government also took charge of creating its own currency, either

by coining it or printing it itself. As we will see, how a government

does this has enormous implications for how its economy func-

tions and what types of risk its residents face in the marketplace.

Money and Its Effect on Interest Rates, Exchange Rates, and Inflation

Although money plays a vital role facilitating exchange, it also

affects several variables that are of great interest to macroecono-

mists: interest rates, exchange rates, and the aggregate price

level. In an important sense, all three of these variables constitute

“prices” of money.

The interest rate can be thought of as the price of holding

money or, alternatively, as the cost of investment funds.

Page 46: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Money

35

In general, most people would prefer to receive $100 in cash

now than to receive the same $100 in cash a year from now.

Economists characterize this trade-off as the “time value of

money.” A consumer may take out a loan (and agree to pay inter-

est on it in the future) in order to receive cash to spend immedi-

ately. Perhaps this consumer prefers to start enjoying a new

television set right away rather than saving up for a year before

enjoying it. Similarly, business managers may wish to borrow

from a bank or float bonds when the interest rate on borrowing

is lower than the return they expect they can make on a new

investment. When interest rates rise, money obviously becomes

more expensive, both for individuals and for firms, and thus the

cost of buying things today (relative to tomorrow or next year)

goes up. In part for these reasons, rising interest rates tend to

slow the growth of output in the economy (by slowing current

consumption and investment), whereas falling interest rates tend

to accelerate the growth of output (by stimulating current con-

sumption and investment).

An exchange rate, meanwhile, is simply the price of one cur-

rency in terms of another. If it costs 100 yen to buy one dollar,

then the yen-to-dollar exchange rate is 100. Conversely, the

dollar-to-yen exchange rate is 0.01. If the yen-to-dollar

exchange rate subsequently fell to 90, this would mean that the

dollar had depreciated (and the yen had appreciated), since it

now took more dollars to buy one yen (and fewer yen to buy

one dollar).* When a country’s exchange rate depreciates,

* It is important to note that when a country’s exchange rate is expressed in terms of another currency (i.e., the other currency is in the denominator), an increase in the rate indicates depreciation of the country’s currency, and a decrease indicates appreciation. For example, if the yen-to-dollar exchange rate “falls” from 100 to 90, then the Japanese yen has appreciated relative to the US dollar, since it now takes fewer yen to buy one dollar (and, what is the same thing, one yen buys more dollars—or, in this case, a larger fraction of a dollar).

Page 47: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Understanding the Macro Economy

36

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

foreigners will find it cheaper to buy that country’s currency,

which may lead them to buy more of the country’s goods as

well. It is for this reason that a depreciating exchange rate is

often regarded as being favorable for a country’s exports. There

is no free lunch, however. A depreciating exchange rate also

means that foreign currencies (and thus foreign goods) appear

more expensive to the country’s citizens, thus reducing their

overall purchasing power.

The aggregate price level (sometimes called the price defla-

tor) is a bit more complicated, since it is not the price of any

one thing in particular. Broadly speaking, the aggregate price

level reflects the average price of all goods and services—or at

least of a broad subset of goods and services—in terms of

money. In a healthy economy, the money prices of individual

goods and services are changing all the time. At any moment,

some may be rising and others falling. For example, the price of

milk might be rising while the price of computers is falling.

There are times, however, when one can detect trends across all

(or at least most) prices. In a period of inflation, when the aggre-

gate price level is increasing, most prices tend to rise, though

some will inevitably rise more than others. In a period of defla-

tion, by contrast, when the aggregate price level is decreasing,

most prices tend to fall, though again some will fall more than

others. It should not be hard to see that the value—or price—of

money in terms of goods and services moves in exactly the

opposite direction as the aggregate price level. When the price

level rises (in a period of inflation), the value of money falls;

and when the price level falls (in a period of deflation), the

value of money rises. (See figure 2-1.)

As it turns out, changes in the quantity of money may affect all

three of these variables—that is, all three “prices” of money.

Page 48: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Money

37

A nation’s central bank can increase the money supply by print-

ing more currency and injecting it into the economy. When the

money supply rises, economists typically expect interest rates to

fall. Although there is no clear consensus on exactly what drives

interest rates, one way to think about this is that the price of a

good tends to fall when its quantity increases. Just as the global

price of oil tends to fall when more of it is pumped out of the

Middle East, the price of obtaining money (the interest rate)

tends to fall when the central bank injects more money into the

domestic economy.

Similarly, when a country’s money supply rises, economists

generally expect the country’s exchange rate to depreciate.

Exchange rate determination, like interest rate determination,

is an immensely difficult and controversial topic. So it is not

possible to explore all of the various theories here. Once again,

however, it is convenient simply to think in terms of supply

and demand. Anything that affects the supply or demand for a

currency will affect its exchange rate. If a new emphasis on

quality in US manufacturing were to make American goods

more attractive all around the world, there would likely be an

increased demand for US dollars (since dollars are needed to

buy American goods), and this would cause the dollar to

appreciate. On the supply side, if the quantity of dollars in

circulation were to rise relative to other currencies, then the

more currency and injecting it into the economy. When the

money supply rises, economists typically expect interest rates to

fall. Although there is no clear consensus on exactly what drives

interest rates, one way to think about this is that the price of a

good tends to fall when its quantity increases. Just as the global

price of oil tends to fall when more of it is pumped out of the

Middle East, the price of obtaining money (the interest rate)

tends to fall when the central bank injects more money into the

domestic economy.

Similarly, when a country’s money supply rises, economists

generally expect the country’s exchange rate to depreciate. Ex-

change rate determination, like interest rate determination, is an

immensely difficult and controversial topic. So it is not possible

to explore all of the various theories here. Once again, however, it

is convenient simply to think in terms of supply and demand.

Anything that affects the supply or demand for a currency will

affect its exchange rate. If a new emphasis on quality in U.S.

manufacturing were to make American goods more attractive all

around the world, there would likely be an increased demand for

U.S. dollars (since dollars are needed to buy American goods),

and this would cause the dollar to appreciate. On the supply

side, if the quantity of dollars in circulation were to rise relative

to other currencies, then its price in terms of the other currencies

Money

37

F I G U R E 2 - 1

The three “prices” of money

1. Price relative to time (or, more precisely, bonds) Interest rate

2. Price relative to foreign currency Exchange rate

3. Price relative to all goods and services Aggregate price level(price deflator)

Moss_02_33to66 4/12/07 1:51 PM Page 37

FIGURE 2-1

The three “prices” of money

Page 49: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Understanding the Macro Economy

38

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

price of the dollar in terms of the other currencies would likely

fall ( depreciate). (For a more detailed treatment of exchange

rates, see chapter 7.)

This brings us to the third variable—the aggregate price

level—and its relationship to money. Economists generally

regard an increase in the money supply—and particularly large

increases in the money supply—as inflationary. Money growth,

in other words, tends to drive up the price level. With more cash

in their pockets and bank accounts, consumers often find new

reasons to buy things. But unless the supply of goods and ser-

vices has increased in the meantime, the consumers’ mounting

demand for products will simply bid up prices, thus stoking

inflation. Economists sometimes say that inflation rises when

“too much money is chasing too few goods.”

Individually, each of these causal relationships is fairly clear.

Each is also symmetric: whereas an increase in the money supply

tends to depress the interest rate, depreciate the exchange rate,

and increase the price level, a decrease in the money supply tends

to lift the interest rate, appreciate the exchange rate, and decrease

the price level. (See figure 2-2.)

would likely fall (depreciate). (For a more detailed treatment of

exchange rates, see chapter 7.)

This brings us to the third variable—the aggregate price

level—and its relationship to money. Economists generally re-

gard an increase in the money supply—and particularly large in-

creases in the money supply—as inflationary. Money growth, in

other words, tends to drive up the price level. With more cash

in their pockets and bank accounts, consumers often find new

reasons to buy things. But unless the supply of goods and ser-

vices has increased in the meantime, the consumers’ mounting

demand for products will simply bid up prices, thus stoking in-

flation. Economists sometimes say that inflation rises when “too

much money is chasing too few goods.”

Individually, each of these causal relationships is fairly clear.

Each is also symmetric: whereas an increase in the money supply

tends to depress the interest rate, depreciate the exchange rate,

and increase the price level, a decrease in the money supply tends

to lift the interest rate, appreciate the exchange rate, and decrease

the price level. (See figure 2-2.)

Understanding the Macro Economy

38

F I G U R E 2 - 2

Money: standard “textbook” relationships

Increase in money supply

Interest rate falls

Exchange rate depreciates

Price level rises (inflation)

Interest rate rises

Exchange rate appreciates

Price level falls (deflation)

Decrease in money supply

Moss_02_33to66 4/12/07 1:51 PM Page 38

FIGURE 2-2

Money: standard “textbook” relationships

Page 50: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Money

39

Nominal versus Real

These relationships between money and other macroeconomic

variables become somewhat more complex when the variables

begin to interact. A good example involves the interaction of

interest rates and inflation. Although an increase in the money

supply is expected to drive down interest rates, it is also expected

to drive up inflation, which may in turn push long-term interest

rates (and, eventually, short-term rates) higher, rather than lower.

To understand why, it is first necessary to understand one of the

central dichotomies in macroeconomics: nominal versus real.

Nominal versus Real GDP

We’ll start with nominal versus real GDP. During an inflationary

period, when all prices are generally on an upward trend, GDP

may rise even if no additional goods and services are being pro-

duced. This is because GDP is measured in terms of current (mar-

ket) prices. Recall that in calculating GDP, officials add up the

value of all final goods and services produced in an economy in a

given year, and they value these goods based on the prices at

which they are sold.

As an illustration, suppose that an island economy produced

only two final goods, coconut milk and rice. Imagine further

that in the year 2010, it produced 1 million gallons of coconut

milk, which it sold at $10 per gallon, and 2 million pounds of

rice, which it sold at $4 per pound. Just a little bit of calculation

reveals that the island’s GDP in 2010 was $18 million. (See

table 2-1.) Now suppose that for some reason the island still

produced 1 million gallons of coconut milk and 2 million

Page 51: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Understanding the Macro Economy

40

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

pounds of rice in 2011, but that the prices of these products on

the island had doubled to $20 per gallon and $8 per pound,

respectively. Naturally, the country’s GDP would rise to

$36 million in 2011, though its actual output (i.e., gallons of

coconut milk and pounds of rice produced) had not increased at

all. (See table 2-2.) In this case, we would say that the island had

experienced a 100 percent inflation rate (since prices had dou-

bled), that its nominal GDP had also increased by 100 percent

(having gone from $18 to $36 million), but that its real GDP

(i.e., its GDP after controlling for inflation) had not changed.

Recall from the previous chapter that macroeconomists pay

a great deal of attention to the quantity of goods and services

an economy produces. This is because the more goods and

services a nation produces (with a stable population), the

higher the standard of living for those who live and work

there. Whereas nominal GDP may increase either because of

changes in price or changes in quantity, real GDP increases

TABLE 2-1

Final output of island economy, 2010 (in current island $)

Output Quantity Price Value of final output

Coconut milk 1 million gallons $10/gallon $10 million

Rice 2 million pounds $4/pound $8 million

$18 million (= 2010 GDP)

TABLE 2-2

Final output of island economy, 2011 (in current island $)

Output Quantity Price Value of final output

Coconut milk 1 million gallons $20/gallon $20 million

Rice 2 million pounds $8/pound $16 million

$36 million (= 2011 GDP)

Page 52: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Money

41

only with changes in quantity. Real GDP, in other words,

measures the quantity of all final goods and services produced

in a country in a given year. Another way of expressing this is

in the following identity:

Nominal GDP = P × Q,

where P is the aggregate price level (or price deflator) and Q is

the total quantity of final output (real GDP).

To reiterate, a country’s prosperity depends on its real GDP

(Q), not its nominal GDP (P × Q). As we saw in the island exam-

ple, when nominal GDP rises solely because of price changes,

residents are left no better off than they were before, since their

command over real goods and services has not increased. Only

when their access to goods and services rises—because of an

increase in Q—are they truly better off in economic terms.

One way to calculate real GDP from year to year is to use a

constant set of prices. In the island example, this would involve

applying the prices in 2010 ($10 per gallon of coconut milk and

$4 per pound of rice) to the output produced in both 2010 and

2011. Doing this would yield a real GDP of $18 million in 2010

and a real GDP of $18 million in 2011, accurately reflecting the

fact that the quantity of output had not increased.

Naturally, the price deflator (P) can immediately be calculated

for both 2010 and 2011, since we know both nominal and real

GDP for both years. For any given year,

Price deflator (P) =Nominal GDP

Real GDP (Q)

This means that the price deflator (P) increased from 1.00 (i.e.,

$18 million/$18 million) in 2010 to 2.00 (i.e., $36 million/$18 mil-

lion) in 2011, accurately reflecting the fact that prices doubled on

the island from one year to the next.2 (See table 2-3.)

Page 53: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Understanding the Macro Economy

42

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

In a more typical example, we might see both nominal and real

GDP rising, but nominal GDP rising faster. This would imply that

national output was increasing, but that inflation was also present.

In the United States between 1980 and 2010, for example, nomi-

nal GDP growth averaged 5.7 percent per year, while real GDP

growth averaged 2.8 percent per year. The annual inflation rate

(which will roughly equal the difference between nominal and

real GDP growth) averaged 2.8 percent, meaning that prices were

rising, on average, by 2.8 percent per year. (See table 2-4.) One

way to characterize US economic performance from 1980 to

2010, therefore, is to say that about half of nominal GDP growth

during these years was attributable to increases in quantity (real

GDP) while the remainder, also about half, was attributable to

price increases (inflation). Had there been no inflation at all, nom-

inal GDP growth and real GDP growth would have been exactly

equal.

Nominal versus Real Interest Rates

The same basic distinction—between nominal and real—can be

applied to interest rates as well. A nominal interest rate is one

that you find quoted at a bank or listed in the newspaper. If you

borrowed $1,000 from a bank for one year at a nominal interest

rate of 5 percent, at the end of that year you would owe the bank

$1,050 (i.e., the original $1,000 in principal plus $1,000 × 5

percent, or $50, in interest). In 2005, the nominal interest rate

TABLE 2-3

Island economy: nominal versus real GDP, 2010–2011

Year Nominal GDP = Price deflator (P) × Real GDP (Q)

2010 $18 million 1.00 $18 million2010 $

2011 $36 million 2.00 $18 million2010 $

Page 54: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Money

43

on overnight bank lending in the United States (the so-called

federal funds rate) averaged 3.22 percent; the nominal interest

rate on 10-year US government bonds, 4.29 percent; and the

nominal interest rate on 10-year home mortgages, 5.94 percent.

(The first of these, the overnight bank rate, is a short-term inter-

est rate, whereas the second and third are long-term interest

rates.)3 By comparison, in 2012, when the Federal Reserve was

keeping interest rates unusually low to encourage investment

and spending in the wake of the 2007–2009 financial crisis, the

federal funds rate averaged 0.14 percent; the nominal interest

rate on 10-year US government bonds, 1.80 percent; and the

nominal interest rate on 10-year home mortgages, 3.69 percent.

As already noted, nominal interest rates tend to rise with infla-

tion. If a bank charged 5 percent interest on a loan when it antic-

ipated zero inflation, it might charge 8 percent when it anticipated

3 percent inflation. In the latter scenario, the nominal rate would

be 8 percent while the so-called real interest rate would remain at

5 percent. The approximate relationship between real and nomi-

nal interest rates can be expressed as follows:

Real interest rate (iR) » Nominal interest rate (iN)

− Expected inflation (Pe)

TABLE 2-4

US economic performance, 1980–2010

1980 2010 1980–2010 CAGRa

Nominal GDP (P × Q) $2,862 billion $14,958 billion 5.7%

Real GDP, 2009 $ (Q) $6,443 billion $14,779 billion 2.8%

GDP deflator, 2010 = 100 (P) 43.9 100.0 2.8%

a CAGR stands for “compound annual growth rate.” The formula for calculating a CAGR is as follows: CAGR = [(Final value/Starting value)[1/(final year – starting year)] – 1] × 100%. This formula is derived from the following growth equation: Final value = Starting value × (1 + r)(number of years), where r is the average annual growth rate of the variable in question.

Page 55: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Understanding the Macro Economy

44

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

Simply put, the real interest rate represents the effective rate of

interest on a loan after controlling for inflation.

Nominal interest rates rise with inflation because creditors care

about their command over real output, not their command over

money per se. Imagine, for example, that a dairy farmer (let’s call

him Bill) agreed to lend his neighbor (Tom) 10 milk cows for an

entire season on the condition that Tom would return all 10 plus

one more cow at the end of the year. This would constitute a one-

year loan at a 10 percent rate of interest. Now suppose that after

repaying the loan at the end of the year (by delivering 11 cows to

Bill), Tom wanted to do the same thing again—that is, he wanted

to borrow 10 cows from Bill for one year at a 10 percent rate of

interest. The only difference was that this time he proposed repay-

ing the loan in money rather than in cows. Since a cow cost $1,000

at the time of the agreement, Tom promised that he would pay Bill

$11,000 at the end of the year. Bill thought this sounded fine and

agreed to the deal. Unfortunately for Bill, however, the price of a

cow increased by 10 percent that year, rising from $1,000 to

$1,100. As a result, when Tom made good on the loan by paying

Bill $11,000 at the end of the year, Bill was only able to buy 10

cows, not 11, with that sum of money. It was as if Bill had lent his

original 10 cows at no interest at all!

Economists would say that under the second arrangement,

the nominal interest rate was 10 percent but that the real interest

rate was zero. For Bill to have maintained an effective (real) rate

of interest of 10 percent—that is, with regard to output rather

than money—he would have had to raise his nominal interest

rate to approximately 20 percent (or 21 percent, to be exact). At

a 21 percent nominal rate of interest, Tom would have been

required to repay $12,100 at the end of the year ($10,000

principal plus $2,100 interest), which would have been just

enough to allow Bill to buy 11 cows at the new price of $1,100

Page 56: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Money

45

each (since 11 × $1,100 = $12,100). It is easy to see from this

example that if the price of cows had increased by one-tenth

(i.e., if cow inflation were 10 percent), Bill would have had to

roughly double the nominal rate of interest (in terms of money)

to preserve a real rate of interest (in terms of cows) of 10 percent.

In assessing whether the cost of borrowing in an economy is

high or low, economists typically focus on real rates rather than

nominal rates. Once again, this is because output—not money—

is what matters most.

Clearly, in a context of zero inflation, a 1,000 percent interest-

rate loan would be very difficult to repay. If you borrowed

$20,000 this year at 1,000 percent interest, you would have to

repay $220,000 next year ($20,000 principal plus $200,000

interest). Since inflation was zero, both the real and nominal rate

of interest would equal 1,000 percent. To consume an additional

$20,000 worth of output this year, you would have to give up

$220,000 worth of output the following year. By almost any

standard, this would be very expensive credit.4

However, if inflation itself reached 1,000 percent, a nominal

interest rate of 1,000 percent would no longer look burdensome

for most borrowers—in fact, it would look very cheap—since

wages and prices were rising by 1,000 percent as well. Under

this second scenario, the nominal rate of interest would still be

1,000 percent, but the real rate of interest (i.e., nominal minus

inflation) would have fallen to zero. As a result, borrowers lucky

enough to get loans at 1,000 percent interest in an environment

of 1,000 percent inflation would feel as if they were paying no

interest at all, since—in terms of what it could actually buy—the

$220,000 repayment would be no greater than the original

$20,000 lent.5 (See table 2-5.)

With all this in mind, we are now ready to reconsider why the

relationship between money growth and interest rates can be

Page 57: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Understanding the Macro Economy

46

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

ambiguous. Normally, when the central bank increases the money

supply, economists expect interest rates—especially short-term

interest rates—to fall. However, growth in the money supply—

particularly if it is substantial—may also spark inflationary expec-

tations, which in turn will tend to push long-term nominal interest

rates upward. And if inflation indeed takes hold, short-term nom-

inal interest rates will eventually rise as well. Because of these con-

flicting pressures (one pushing down and the other pushing up),

the ultimate effect on nominal interest rates of a large increase in

money supply is ambiguous. Real interest rates are very likely to

fall. Short-term nominal rates will almost surely fall immediately,

but may rise later on if inflation kicks in. And long-term nominal

rates may fall, rise, or stay the same, depending mainly on what

happens to inflationary expectations. (See figure 2-3.)

TABLE 2-5

Example: real versus nominal interest rates

Nominal (posted) interest rate on loan

Rate of inflation

Real interest rate

Effective cost of borrowing

Scenario 1: 1,000% 0% 1,000% Very high

Scenario 2: 1,000% 1,000% 0% Very low

ambiguous. Normally, when the central bank increases the money

supply, economists expect interest rates—especially short-term

interest rates—to fall. However, growth in the money supply—

particularly if it is substantial—may also spark inflationary expec-

tations, which in turn will tend to push long-term nominal

interest rates upward. And if inflation indeed takes hold, short-

term nominal interest rates will eventually rise as well. Because of

these conflicting pressures (one pushing down and the other

pushing up), the ultimate effect on nominal interest rates of a large

increase in money supply is ambiguous. Real interest rates are very

likely to fall. Short-term nominal rates will almost surely fall im-

mediately, but may rise later on if inflation kicks in. And long-term

nominal rates may fall, rise, or stay the same, depending mainly

on what happens to inflationary expectations. (See figure 2-3.)

Understanding the Macro Economy

46

TABL E 2 -5

Example: real versus nominal interest rates

Nominal (posted) Rate of Real Effective costinterest rate on loan inflation interest rate of borrowing

Scenario 1: 1,000% 0% 1,000% Very high

Scenario 2: 1,000% 1,000% 0% Very low

F I G U R E 2 - 3

Money growth, inflation, and interest rates (nominal versus real)

Increase inmoney supply

Nominal interest rate falls

Real interest rate falls

Inflation may rise Nominal interest rate rises

?

Moss_02_33to66 4/12/07 1:51 PM Page 46

FIGURE 2-3

Money growth, inflation, and interest rates (nominal versus real)

Page 58: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Money

47

Nominal versus Real Exchange Rates

The distinction between nominal and real can be applied to

exchange rates as well. Even if a country’s nominal exchange

rate is depreciating, its real exchange rate will depreciate less (or

may even appreciate) if inflation is rising faster than in other

countries.

To understand why, we should start with nominal exchange

rates. As we have seen, if a country’s currency depreciates relative

to other currencies, then it will appear cheaper to foreigners.

This, in turn, will make the country’s goods and services look

cheaper to foreigners, which may well entice them to buy more

of the country’s exports. The country’s own citizens, meanwhile,

will find it more expensive to buy foreign currencies, which may

deter them from buying as many imports from abroad. It is in

this sense that depreciation of a country’s currency is seen as

favorable to its trade balance (since its exports will tend to rise

and its imports will tend to fall).

A simple illustration should help make this clear. Imagine that

the yen-to-dollar exchange rate was 100 (i.e., 100 yen to 1 dollar)

and that a Japanese-made calculator cost ¥900 in Japan and an

American-made calculator cost $10 in the United States. If

transportation costs were low, Americans would prefer to import

Japanese-made calculators, since they would cost only $9 at the

prevailing exchange rate (plus a bit more for transportation), as

compared with $10 for American-made calculators. Now

suppose that the dollar depreciated by 20 percent, driving the

yen-to-dollar exchange rate to 80. If the price of domestically

produced calculators didn’t change in either country, Americans

would start buying American calculators, since Japanese

calculators would now cost $11.25 (i.e., 900/80) plus

Page 59: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Understanding the Macro Economy

48

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

transportation costs, while American calculators would still cost

$10. Simultaneously, Japanese might now prefer American-made

calculators as well, since they would cost only ¥800 at the new

exchange rate (plus transportation costs), as compared with

¥900 for Japanese-made calculators. Thus, after its currency

depreciated, America’s imports would fall and its exports would

rise. (See table 2-6.)

This result could be completely negated, however, if the

United States experienced rising inflation at the same time.

Suppose, as in the previous example, the US dollar depreciated

by 20 percent (to a yen-to-dollar exchange rate of 80), but that

this time the United States experienced 30 percent inflation,

while Japan experienced no inflation at all. Because of the rise in

American inflation, the price of an American-made calculator

would likely rise by 30 percent to $13 or ¥1,040 (at the exchange

rate of 80 yen to the dollar). Since Japanese calculators would still

cost only ¥900 or $11.25 (at the exchange rate of 80 yen to the

dollar), both Japanese and Americans would likely revert to buy-

ing Japanese-made calculators. American imports would rise, and

American exports would fall—just as if its currency had appreci-

ated. In fact, although its nominal exchange rate had depreciated

by 20 percent, its real exchange rate (i.e., the effective exchange

TABLE 2-6

Cost of calculators, in $ and ¥, before and after nominal depreciation of the dollar

¥/$ ER

Cost of US-made calculator

Cost of US-made calculator

Cost of Japanese-made calculator

Cost of Japanese-made calculator

Country from which calculators bought

Before 100 $10 ¥1,000 ¥900 $9.00 Japan

After 80 $10 ¥800 ¥900 $11.25 US

Page 60: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Money

49

rate after controlling for inflation) had actually appreciated,

because its inflation rate (relative to Japan’s) had increased by

more than 20 percent.

The relationship between real and nominal exchange rates in

this example can be expressed in the following approximation

(which obviously can be applied to any two countries, not just

the United States and Japan):

% DReal exchange rate (¥/$)

» % DNominal exchange rate (¥/$)

− (Japanese inflation % − US inflation %)

If we assume, for convenience, that foreign inflation is zero,

then (by rearranging terms) we can also say that the real appre-

ciation of a country’s currency approximately equals the coun-

try’s inflation rate minus its nominal depreciation rate—that is:

Real appreciation of Currency X

» Inflation rate of Country X

− Nominal depreciation of Currency X

where all of these changes are expressed in percentages. (See

table 2-7.)

Although the notion of a real exchange rate remains unfa-

miliar to many business managers and investors, those

involved in international transactions ignore it at their peril.

Consider just one example. In the early 1990s, as US invest-

ment was pouring into Mexico, many American portfolio man-

agers celebrated Mexico’s pegged nominal exchange rate as an

important safeguard of their investments.6 But they seemed to

pay scant attention to Mexico’s rapidly appreciating real

Page 61: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Understanding the Macro Economy

50

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

TABLE 2-7

Nominal versus real exchange rates—four scenarios

% change in nominal ¥/$ exchange rate

Inflation rate (Japan)

Inflation rate (US)

Approx. % change in real ¥/$ exchange rate

Expected effect on US balance of trade

Scenario 1: −20% (deprecia-tion of $)

0% 30% 10% (apprecia-tion of $)

Unfavorable (¯ BOT)

Scenario 2: −20% (deprecia-tion of $)

0% 20% 0% Neutral

Scenario 3: −20% (deprecia-tion of $)

0% 10% −10% (deprecia-tion of $)

Favorable (� BOT)

Scenario 4: −20% (deprecia-tion of $)

30% 30% −20% (deprecia-tion of $)

Favorable (� BOT)

exchange rate, which resulted from the combination of its

pegged nominal rate against the dollar on the one hand and

inflation that was running higher than inflation in the United

States on the other. To be sure, the peso’s dramatic real appre-

ciation offered an important signal of potential trouble ahead,

undermining Mexico’s trade position and thus intensifying its

dependence on ever-larger inflows of foreign capital.

Particularly well-informed investors may have recognized that

a large real appreciation could presage a substantial deprecia-

tion of the nominal exchange rate (and thus a sharp decline in

the dollar value of their peso-denominated assets). Most inves-

tors, however, were apparently caught by surprise—and suf-

fered big losses—when the peso collapsed in a full-blown

currency crisis beginning in late 1994. Clearly, the concept of

a real exchange rate, though rather academic-sounding, can be

of profound practical significance in business transactions.

(See “Real Exchange Rates and Foreign Investment.”)

Page 62: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Money

51

Real Exchange Rates and Foreign Investment

A basic understanding of real exchange rates (and how they

affect company sales and profits) is vital for any business

manager engaged in international trade or investment.

Consider, for example, a manager responsible for the Chinese

production subsidiary of an American mobile phone company.

Because China (like many developing countries) essentially pegs

its exchange rate to the dollar, the manager would be wise to

think hard about the implications of a sudden surge in Chinese

inflation. After all, if prices rose faster in China than in the United

States, then the yuan would appreciate in real terms against the

dollar, even though the nominal exchange rate (that is, the one

reported in the newspaper and on the web) remained steady as

a rock, held in place by an official exchange rate peg.

This real appreciation of the yuan would generate three

(potentially conflicting) effects on the subsidiary in China:

1. More intense price competition from foreign imports into the

Chinese market

2. More intense price competition from foreign producers within

foreign markets; and

3. A more favorable effective rate of repatriation on profit mar-

gins earned within China

Clearly, the first two effects would be quite negative for the

subsidiary, while the third would be positive, so long as there

were still some profits left to repatriate.

The reason that price competition would become stiffer for the

American subsidiary operating in China is that it would face higher

Page 63: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Understanding the Macro Economy

52

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

production costs (including higher wages and higher domestic

input prices) as a consequence of rising Chinese inflation. If the

subsidiary tried to pass these higher costs along to consumers in

the form of higher prices, then it would risk losing market share—

both in and outside of China—to American (and other foreign)

producers that didn’t face comparable cost increases at home.

Confronted with a real appreciation of the yuan, the subsid-

iary’s manager would thus face the unenviable choice of either

squeezing margins to protect market share or surrendering mar-

ket share to maintain margins. Either way, it would be bad news

for the subsidiary’s bottom line.

In fact, the only possible good news would involve repatriation.

If the subsidiary had enjoyed, say, a 10 percent margin on sales

before the real appreciation, and if it somehow managed to pre-

serve this margin afterward (a rather big if, to be sure), the same

10 percent margin would now—because of Chinese inflation—

translate into a larger number of nominal yuan. And, with the

nominal exchange rate still pegged to the dollar (at the same

official rate), a larger number of yuan would inevitably translate

into a larger number of dollars, once repatriated.

The point is that the effects of a real appreciation, triggered by

inflation, will closely mimic the effects of a nominal appreciation,

both favorable and unfavorable, even though the nominal

exchange rate hasn’t budged. Unfortunately, many business

managers— particularly those with little experience in international

markets—remain far more alert to changes in nominal exchange

rates than to changes in real exchange rates, even though the lat-

ter may be every bit as important in determining the health and

vitality of their firms.

Page 64: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Money

53

We return to exchange rates in subsequent sections (and in

chapter 7). But for now, it is worth noting how the nominal–real

divide can affect the relationship between money growth,

exchange rates, and the balance of trade. As already suggested,

substantial money growth in a country is likely to cause the

country’s nominal exchange rate to depreciate. But substantial

money growth can also spark domestic inflation, which can

cause the real exchange rate to move in the other direction. The

key question is whether domestic inflation is greater than

exchange-rate depreciation—or, more precisely, whether the dif-

ference between domestic and foreign inflation is larger than the

depreciation of the domestic currency relative to the foreign cur-

rency. If the inflation-rate differential (domestic minus foreign)

exceeds the nominal rate of depreciation of the exchange rate,

then the real exchange rate will appreciate, placing downward

pressure on the balance of trade. If the inflation-rate differential

is less than the nominal rate of depreciation of the exchange rate,

then the real exchange rate will depreciate, placing upward

pressure on the balance of trade. (See figure 2-4.)

nominal rate of depreciation of the exchange rate, then the real

exchange rate will depreciate, placing upward pressure on the

balance of trade. (See figure 2-4.)

Money Illusion and Sticky Wages

In an ideal world, individuals would always be able to distin-

guish real economic changes from merely nominal ones. If a

worker’s wage rose by exactly the same percentage as the overall

price level, she would recognize that her purchasing power had

not increased as a result. Even though her monthly payroll

checks would look larger in nominal terms, she would still not be

able to buy more goods and services than before because the

prices of those goods would have increased exactly in proportion

to her pay, thus leaving her real wage unchanged.

Although in principle this distinction should be clear, in prac-

tice it can be murky. One potential problem, which remains con-

troversial among economists, is the notion that many individuals

suffer from “money illusion.” That is, they may sometimes appear

to be more concerned about nominal values rather than real val-

ues. Workers, for example, may worry more about the size of

Understanding the Macro Economy

54

F I G U R E 2 - 4

Money growth, inflation, and exchange rates (nominal versus real)

Increase inmoney supply

Nominal exchange rate may depreciate

Real exchange rate may depreciate

Inflation may rise Real exchange rate may appreciate

?

Moss_02_33to66 4/12/07 1:51 PM Page 54

FIGURE 2-4

Money growth, inflation, and exchange rates (nominal versus real)

Page 65: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Understanding the Macro Economy

54

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

Money Illusion and Sticky Wages

In an ideal world, individuals would always be able to distinguish

real economic changes from merely nominal ones. If a worker’s

wage rose by exactly the same percentage as the overall price

level, she would recognize that her purchasing power had not

increased as a result. Even though her monthly payroll checks

would look larger in nominal terms, she would still not be able to

buy more goods and services than before because the prices of

those goods and services would have increased exactly in pro-

portion to her pay, thus leaving her real wage unchanged.

Although in principle this distinction should be clear, in prac-

tice it can be murky. One potential problem, which remains con-

troversial among economists, is the notion that many individuals

suffer from “money illusion.” That is, they may sometimes appear

to be more concerned about nominal values than real values.

Workers, for example, may worry more about the size of their

nominal wage than about their real purchasing power. If true,

money illusion could help to explain why nominal wages tend to

be sticky, particularly on the downside. When prices rise, work-

ers may fail to demand sufficient wage increases to prevent the

inflation from cutting into their purchasing power. However,

when prices fall, these same workers may—if influenced by

money illusion—fiercely oppose any suggestion of nominal wage

reductions, even though their real purchasing power has grown

dramatically as a result of the deflation.

Some economists view wage stickiness as a cause of unem-

ployment during periods of deflation (falling prices). If workers

refused to accept smaller nominal wages during such periods

(potentially as a result of money illusion), their real wages would

rise rapidly as prices fell. Eventually, their real wages would reach

a level that their employers simply could no longer afford to pay,

Page 66: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Money

55

and the workers would be laid off. If only the workers had

focused on maintaining their real wages rather than their nominal

wages, the argument goes, they might have kept their jobs.

The notion of money illusion dates back a long way. In fact,

the American economist Irving Fisher published a seminal book

on the subject in 1928.7 Although few economists today regard

money illusion as a major source of wage rigidity, it nonetheless

stands out as an early—if now contested—explanation for why

wages may not always adjust as rapidly in practice as they should

in theory.

Money and Banking

So far, we have talked quite a bit about money without saying

much about where it comes from or about the different forms it

takes.

In most countries, only the government can issue currency,

which is “legal tender” and therefore required by law to be

accepted as payment for all debts. Take a look at a dollar bill and

note what is imprinted on the front: “This note is legal tender for

all debts, public and private.” Currency thus serves as a very reli-

able and convenient means of payment for many transactions.

Typically, national central banks take responsibility for deciding

how much currency to issue. In the United States, the central

bank is called the Federal Reserve. If you take another look at

that dollar bill, you will notice the words “Federal Reserve Note”

printed at the very top, indicating that the bill is an obligation of

the Federal Reserve.8

Although the central bank decides how much currency to

issue, it is important to recognize that the central bank is not the

only institution that creates money. Commercial banks play a

Page 67: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Understanding the Macro Economy

56

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

crucial role as well. This is because currency is not the only form

of money. According to a standard definition of the money sup-

ply known as M1, checking accounts also count as money since

checks are widely accepted as a means of payment and are highly

liquid—that is, they can easily be converted to currency.

Because checking accounts allow the account holders either to

withdraw or to transfer the deposited funds on demand, econo-

mists typically refer to these accounts as “demand deposits.” And

demand deposits are an important component of the money

supply. At the end of 2012, there was a total of $1.091 trillion

worth of US currency (i.e., one-dollar bills, five-dollar bills, ten-

dollar bills, and so forth) in circulation. At the same time, banks

and thrifts held a total of $1.345 trillion in demand (and other

checkable) deposits. As just noted, M1 money supply includes

these two items: currency in circulation and demand deposits,

both of which are widely used—and widely accepted—as means

of payment.9

Because checking accounts constitute an important form of

money, commercial banks play a vital role in money creation.

Through a process of taking deposits and lending out most of the

funds received, banks actually expand the money supply beyond

the amount of currency in circulation.

Imagine, for example, that you go to the bank and deposit

$100 in cash into your checking account. At that moment, the

size of the overall money supply doesn’t change. You have an

additional $100 in your checking account, but the $100 you

once had in your pocket is now in a bank vault. Because the cash

is no longer in circulation, it is not included in M1 money sup-

ply. However, in most cases, the bank will quickly lend out most

of that cash, limited only by a legal reserve requirement (which

compels the bank to keep about 10 percent of the cash on

Page 68: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Money

57

reserve). Now the money supply has increased. You have your

$100 in the form of a demand deposit (checking account), and

the person who borrowed from the bank has, say, $90 of the cash

that you used to have in your pocket. So the money supply has

increased by $90. As you may have guessed, however, the pro-

cess doesn’t end there. If the borrower buys something with that

cash and the recipient deposits it in his bank, then the process

will start all over again, and even more money will be created.

To see how much money will be created based on an addi-

tional dollar of deposits, economists calculate the so-called

money multiplier. The money multiplier simply equals one over

the proportion not lent out (also known as the “leakage” from

the deposit and lending process). Thus,

Money multiplier = 1/(proportion of leakage).

If banks always lent out 90 percent of deposited funds and all

lent funds were ultimately redeposited, then the leakage would

be 10 percent (or 0.10) and the money multiplier would be 10

(i.e., 1/0.10). This implies that a single dollar of currency would

turn into 10 dollars of total M1 as a result of the deposit and

lending process. (In practice, the money multiplier is much

smaller than 10, in part because individuals don’t deposit nearly

all of their cash in checking accounts, meaning that total leakage

is considerably higher than 10 percent. Even so, banks still play

a very large role in money creation.)

One obvious problem with this mechanism is that if everyone

who had deposited funds in a bank asked to withdraw their cash

at the same time, the bank would not be able to comply, since it

had lent out a large proportion of their funds. Normally, this is

not a problem, since total withdrawals tend to be relatively small

Page 69: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Understanding the Macro Economy

58

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

(and thus manageable) on any given day. But the simple fact is

that if a large proportion of depositors demand their cash at the

same time (either because they all need it for some reason or out

of fear that their bank is in trouble), then the bank will fail. This

is known as a bank run or bank panic. Before the introduction of

federal deposit insurance in 1933, banking panics were a recur-

ring feature of American economic life. A very similar dynamic

was visible during the financial crisis of 2007–2009, although

this time mainly among so-called shadow banks, which operated

without federal insurance.

The Art and Science of Central Banking

Although commercial banks certainly help create money, central

banks are particularly important to macroeconomists because

they have the power to expand and contract the money supply.

Central banks can literally create money at will, and they can

also destroy it.

Prior to the financial crisis of 2007–2009, central bankers typ-

ically regarded short-term interest rates, not the money supply

itself, as the primary instrument of monetary policy, and they

manipulated the money supply as needed to produce the interest

rates they desired. If the directors of a national central bank

decided, for example, that they wanted to lower the overnight

bank rate from 3.0 percent to 2.5 percent, they would announce

the change in policy and would increase money growth as much

as was necessary to drive the overnight rate down to 2.5 percent.

In fact, if the central bank was highly credible, the announce-

ment itself might be enough to drive the rate down to 2.5 percent.

Even so, the central bank would still probably accelerate money

growth to support the new rate.10

Page 70: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Money

59

Despite the importance of the short-term interest rate, money

is actually the factor that central banks control most directly. In

fact, they exercise complete (monopolistic) control over the

monetary base, including the nation’s supply of currency, and

they are able to move interest rates only because of that control.

If the government ever gave up its monopoly over legal-tender

currency, the central bank’s ability to set short-term interest rates

would disappear as well.

It is a bit like the relationship between the speedometer and

the gas pedal on a car. When drivers wish to go faster, they press

on the gas pedal and watch the speedometer. Although increased

gas flow to the engine is what makes the car go faster, drivers

generally set their targets in terms of speed (miles per hour)

rather than gallons per hour of gas flow. In monetary policy,

although money is ultimately the gas that makes the car go, cen-

tral bankers generally focus on the short-term interest rate as

their main policy instrument, rather than the money supply

itself. However, after the US Federal Reserve had pushed the

short-term interest rate essentially to zero to combat the financial

crisis of 2007–2009 and the resulting economic downturn,

American central bankers began to rely more heavily on mone-

tary expansion itself. The term “quantitative easing”—which in

the US context implied the purchase of longer-term instruments

ranging from mortgage-backed securities to corporate debt,

ideally to help lower longer-term interest rates—became part of

the economic lexicon. (For a fuller definition, see the glossary.)

In principle, central bankers can use monetary policy in the

pursuit of many different objectives. If they believe GDP is

growing too slowly or that unemployment is too high, they

can reduce interest rates in order to stimulate economic activ-

ity. Conversely, they can raise interest rates if they think infla-

tion is too high or is about to become too high as a result of

Page 71: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Understanding the Macro Economy

60

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

rapid and unsustainable GDP growth (overheating). They can

also target a particular exchange rate, raising interest rates

when their currency falls in value relative to other currencies,

and lowering interest rates when it rises relative to other cur-

rencies. Or they can reduce interest rates (and expand the

money supply) in times of financial turmoil to help stabilize

the financial system.

In practice, most central bankers are mindful of all these

objectives—vigorous but sustainable GDP growth, low unem-

ployment, low inflation, steady exchange rates, a stable financial

The Phillips Curve

In 1958, economist A. W. Phillips published a major study purport-

ing to demonstrate an inverse relationship between inflation and

unemployment. The study was based on nearly a hundred years of

British wage and unemployment data. The essential finding was

that high rates of inflation were generally associated with low unem-

ployment rates and, conversely, that low inflation rates were gener-

ally associated with high rates of unemployment. The Phillips curve,

shown in this box, graphically represents the trade-off between infla-

tion and unemployment that Professor Phillips made famous. The

precise relationship Phillips identified was subsequently challenged

by other leading economists (including Milton Friedman and

Edmund Phelps), who emphasized the importance of inflationary

expectations and the possibility that a Phillips curve could move

over time. Although policy makers might be able to push unemploy-

ment temporarily below its “natural rate” by stimulating inflation

through aggressive fiscal or monetary policy, people would soon

Page 72: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Money

61

adapt to higher expected inflation, and unemployment would return

to its “natural rate” (but now with a higher background rate of infla-

tion). The “stagflation” of the 1970s certainly proved that inflation

and unemployment could rise together, at least under certain

circumstances.

Although Phillips’s model has since been improved in a num-

ber of important ways, a modified version of the original Phillips

curve (frequently referred to as an “expectations-augmented”

Phillips curve) remains to this day a staple of modern macroeco-

nomic thought.

system, and so forth. Note, however, that there are often

trade-offs involved. If a central bank raises interest rates to

reduce inflation, for example, it may slow GDP growth and

raise unemployment at the same time, a trade-off suggested by

the so-called Phillips curve (see “The Phillips Curve”). An

increase in the interest rate may even cause the nation’s cur-

rency to appreciate, which could further weaken the domestic

economy by undercutting exports. Clearly, it is not possible to

achieve all of the various objectives simultaneously. In recent

times, most central bankers appear to have made low inflation

Curve”). An increase in the interest rate may even cause the

nation’s currency to appreciate, which could further weaken the

domestic economy by undercutting exports. Clearly, it is not pos-

sible to achieve all of the various objectives simultaneously. In re-

cent years, most central bankers appear to have made low

inflation their dominant policy objective.

In chapters 3 and 4 we return to the question of what central

banks are trying to achieve by raising and lowering interest rates.

First, however, we need to identify the tools that they have at

their disposal to do this.

Money

61

monetary policy, people would soon adapt to higher expected in-

flation, and unemployment would return to its “natural rate” (but

now with a higher background rate of inflation). The “stagflation”

of the 1970s certainly proved that inflation and unemployment

could rise together, at least under certain circumstances.

Although Phillips’s model has since been improved in a num-

ber of important ways, a modified version of the original Phillips

curve (frequently referred to as an “expectations-augmented”

Phillips curve) remains to this day a staple of modern macro-

economic thought.

“Overheating”

“Recession”

Inflationrate (%)

The traditional Phillips curvesuggests an inverse relationshipbetween inflation and unemployment.

Unemployment rate (%)

Moss_02_33to66 5/1/07 11:12 AM Page 61

Page 73: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Understanding the Macro Economy

62

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

their dominant policy objective. Yet in the heat of the 2007–2009

crisis, financial stability seemed to become the top priority—at

least for the Federal Reserve. In late 2012, moreover, with high

joblessness persisting, the Fed announced that it would remain

particularly attentive to unemployment as well as inflation,

continuing to keep the federal funds rate near zero “as long as

the unemployment rate remains above 6-1/2 percent, inflation

between one and two years ahead is projected to be no more

than a half percentage point above the Committee’s 2 percent

longer-run goal, and longer-term inflation expectations con-

tinue to be well anchored.”11

In chapters 3 and 4 we return to the question of what central

banks are trying to achieve by raising and lowering interest rates.

First, however, we need to identify the tools that they have at

their disposal to do this.

The Three Basic Tools of Monetary Policy

Traditionally, macroeconomists have highlighted three basic

tools of monetary policy. To begin with, a central bank has the

power to lend to commercial banks at any interest rate that it

chooses. This interest rate, known as the discount rate in the

United States, represents one of the three basic tools of monetary

policy. By lowering its discount rate, a central bank can encour-

age commercial banks to borrow from it, since they in turn can

lend out the borrowed money at a higher interest rate and make

a profit on the deal. When commercial banks come to borrow

that money, the central bank simply issues new money and lends

it to them, thus increasing the money supply. And because there’s

a money multiplier (based on the iterative deposit and lending

process), the initial increase in the so-called monetary base (i.e.,

the money that the central bank issues) will eventually spawn an

Page 74: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Money

63

even larger increase in M1 (i.e., currency plus demand deposits).

In this way, the central bank can increase the money supply by

lowering its discount rate. Conversely, the central bank can con-

tract the money supply (or slow its growth) by raising its dis-

count rate.

Another tool the central bank can use to manage the money

supply is the reserve requirement on bank deposits. The reserve

requirement—which is set by the central bank—dictates what

proportion of every deposit banks are required to hold in reserve

(and thus not lend out). Since the reserve requirement repre-

sents a leakage from the deposit and lending process (and since

the money multiplier is inversely related to the leakage), a higher

reserve requirement will diminish the money multiplier and, in

turn, reduce the money supply. A lower reserve requirement, by

contrast, will raise the money multiplier and thus expand the

money supply. In the example given earlier, where we assumed

no leakages other than a reserve requirement of 10 percent, the

money multiplier was 10 (i.e., 1/0.10). Starting with a monetary

base of $100, M1 money supply (including both currency in

circulation and demand deposits) would swell to $1,000 as a

result of the deposit and lending process. If the central bank

reduced the reserve requirement to 5 percent, the money multi-

plier would rise to 20 (i.e., 1/0.05) and M1 would expand to

$2,000. If, instead, the central bank increased the reserve

requirement to 20 percent, the money multiplier would fall to 5

(i.e., 1/0.20) and the money supply would contract to just $500.

(See figure 2-5.) The point is that a central bank can influence

the money supply via the money multiplier by adjusting the

reserve requirement.

Finally, the third basic tool of monetary policy involves central

bank purchases and sales of financial securities on the open mar-

ket, known as open market operations. When the central bank

Page 75: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Understanding the Macro Economy

64

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

wants to expand the money supply, it buys government bonds

or other assets from private financial institutions, injecting cash

into the economy. This is called an open market purchase, since

the central bank is purchasing financial assets. When the central

bank wishes to contract the money supply (or slow its growth),

it executes an open market sale, selling assets to financial institu-

tions and thus withdrawing cash from the economy.

In the United States, open market operations represent the

dominant method the Federal Reserve (“the Fed”) uses to move

the overnight bank rate, known in the United States as the fed-

eral funds rate.* Prior to the financial crisis of 2007–2009, it had

* The federal funds rate is the interest rate commercial banks charge one another for overnight lending. It is called the federal funds rate because banks typically lend and borrow funds (reserves) that are on deposit at the Federal Reserve. Despite the name, no lending or borrowing by the federal government is involved.

money supply. In the example given earlier, where we assumed

no leakages other than a reserve requirement of 10 percent, the

money multiplier was 10 (i.e., 1/0.10). Starting with a monetary

base of $100, M1 money supply (including both currency in cir-

culation and demand deposits) would swell to $1,000 as a result

of the deposit and lending process. If the central bank reduced

the reserve requirement to 5 percent, the money multiplier would

rise to 20 (i.e., 1/0.05) and M1 would expand to $2,000. If, in-

stead, the central bank increased the reserve requirement to 20

percent, the money multiplier would fall to 5 (i.e., 1/0.20) and

the money supply would contract to just $500. (See figure 2-5.)

The point is that a central bank can influence the money supply

via the money multiplier by adjusting the reserve requirement.

Money

63

F IGU R E 2 -5

The three tools of monetary policy

Discount rate

↑ Discount rate → ↓Borrowing by

→ ↓ Monetary base → ↓ Money supplycommercial banks

↓ Discount rate → ↑Borrowing by

→ ↑ Monetary base → ↑ Money supplycommercial banks

Reserve requirement

↑Reserve → ↑ Leakage → ↓ Money multiplier → ↓ Money supplyrequirement

↓Reserve → ↓ Leakage → ↑ Money multiplier → ↑ Money supply requirement

Open market operations

Open market → Injection → ↑ Monetary base → ↑ Money supplypurchases of liquidity

Open market → Withdrawal → ↓ Monetary base → ↓ Money supplysales of liquidity

Moss_02_33to66 4/12/07 1:51 PM Page 63

FIGURE 2-5

The three tools of monetary policy

Page 76: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Money

65

become quite rare for the Fed to lend directly to commercial

banks through its discount window. In fact, the discount rate

had become largely symbolic, playing almost no tangible role in

US monetary policy. (This changed during the crisis—as the dis-

count window became active again—but such direct lending

diminished greatly once the crisis ended.) Reserve requirements,

meanwhile, are adjusted occasionally, but not often. Open mar-

ket operations have long been—and remain—the principal

mechanism through which the Fed attempts to influence the

money supply. It is worth repeating, however, that the purpose

of open market operations—at least in a modern context, and

apart from recent experiments with so-called quantitative

easing—has generally been to move a particular short-term

interest rate (such as the federal funds rate) to a desired level.

Although once fashionable, particularly in academic circles, the

notion of aiming for a specific monetary target (such as a regular

3.5 percent rate of growth in the money supply) is rarely

regarded as an end in itself anymore.

Theory versus Practice: A Warning

In thinking about the sorts of economic relationships highlighted

throughout this book, one very important thing to keep in mind

is that they are not meant literally as descriptions of reality, but

rather as baselines against which to compare and make sense of

reality. A favorite expression among economists is ceteris paribus,

which means “with all other things constant.” If all other factors

were held constant as money supply rose, we would expect

interest rates to fall. But, as everyone knows, in real life other fac-

tors hardly ever remain constant. Imagine, for instance, that just

as the Federal Reserve executed an open market purchase to

increase the money supply, Americans all across the country sud-

denly decided that they needed to hold more money—in their

Page 77: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Understanding the Macro Economy

66

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

wallets, under their mattresses, or in their checking accounts.

Perhaps they had just received a warning about a major terrorist

threat and thought it would be wise to keep more money on

hand, even if this required liquidating some other assets, such as

savings bonds or certificates of deposit. Whatever the case,

demand for money would rise, and this would place upward

pressure on interest rates, just as more demand for oil (or any

other product) will tend to raise its price. The Federal Reserve

might well find that although it had increased the money supply,

its action was offset by an even larger increase in money demand,

leading interest rates to rise rather than fall.

The point of this little example is simply to remind you that

the economic relationships described in these pages (and in the

pages of economics textbooks) are not immutable laws of nature.

In fact, they break down in practice all the time. If you take a

look at data on money supply and interest rates for any country

over any significant period of time, you’ll find plenty of examples

of interest rates rising as the money supply expands and interest

rates falling as money growth slows, precisely the opposite of

what an economics textbook would predict. But this does not

mean that learning about these relationships is useless. Far from

it. Only by understanding the baseline relationships can you

begin to recognize departures from the rule and, most impor-

tant, begin to formulate reasoned explanations for what might be

driving them.

Page 78: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

67

C H A P T E R T H R E E

Expectations

A final topic of great importance in macroeconomics is expecta-

tions. Expectations about the future play a pivotal role in every

market economy, influencing in one way or another nearly every

economic transaction and decision. As we have seen, expecta-

tions can drive an entire economy in one direction or another

and can even become self-fulfilling. If depositors expect a bank

to fail, it very well might if fearful depositors begin pulling their

money out en masse. Similarly, for the economy as a whole,

expectations of inflation can produce the real thing; and an econ-

omy can fall into recession if enough people expect it to falter.

These sorts of expectations are of particular interest to macro-

economists.

The good news is that expectations can push economic reality

not only in a negative direction, but in a positive one as well.

Ch03.indd 67 19/05/14 11:26 PM

Page 79: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Understanding the Macro Economy

68

Sometimes these favorable expectations emerge on their own. At

other times, many macroeconomists believe, the government has

to help cultivate them. In fact, managing expectations may well

be the most important function of macroeconomic policy, both

monetary and fiscal.

Expectations and Inflation

Naturally, neither firms nor individuals want to come out on the

losing side of inflation. If workers expect consumer prices to rise

in the months and years ahead, they will likely demand higher

wages to ensure that their real incomes—that is, their incomes

after adjusting for inflation—don’t fall. By the same token, if

firms expect wages and other input prices to rise, they are likely

to try to raise their prices to ensure that their earnings don’t fall.

Prices and wages will therefore rise in reality as individuals and

firms try to protect themselves against expected price increases.

In this way, expectations of inflation can powerfully drive reality.

One of the main tasks of any central bank is to convince the pub-

lic that the price level is unlikely to rise by very much in the

future—or, in other words, that inflation will be low. This way,

expectations can become an ally rather than an enemy. If this is to

occur, central banks must be credible. That is, for expectations of

inflation to be low, the public must believe that the central bank will

aggressively and effectively combat inflation (through interest rate

hikes, for example) the moment the price level begins to rise too

much. Once a central bank achieves such credibility on the infla-

tion front, its job becomes much easier, since high inflation itself

becomes much less likely. Conversely, a central bank that suffers

from low credibility will find itself in a heap of trouble, with infla-

tionary pressures potentially popping up everywhere all the time.

Ch03.indd 68 19/05/14 11:26 PM

Page 80: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Expectations

69

The reason that credibility of this sort is difficult to obtain is

that combating inflation can be very painful. To fight inflation, a

central bank typically has to raise interest rates (which likely

involves cutting, or at least slowing the growth of, the money

supply). As interest rates rise with tighter monetary policy, con-

sumption and investment may slow, since both consumer and

business borrowing become more expensive. Output itself may

grow at a slower pace, or even contract, and unemployment is

likely to rise.

To kill the high inflation of the 1970s, Federal Reserve

Chairman Paul Volcker pushed the federal funds rate to unprec-

edented levels (20 percent at its peak), inducing what was then

the worst economic downturn since the 1930s. Real GDP fell by

about 2 percent in 1982, and unemployment reached nearly

10 percent that year. Politicians from both political parties

expressed outrage. A Republican candidate for the US Senate

charged in January 1982 that Volcker’s “policy of high interest

rates is strangling the American economy and throwing millions

of Americans out of work.”1 Although today Volcker is widely

credited with having slain double-digit inflation, he was widely

criticized (even reviled) at the time he did it.

Had Chairman Volcker been subject to a direct election, he

might well have felt compelled to bow to public pressure and

ease his assault on inflation. After all, given that he was at least

partly—and perhaps mainly—responsible for driving unem-

ployment to its highest rate in nearly a half-century, his odds

of winning reelection would have been long indeed. But

Volcker, like all Fed chairmen, was a presidential appointee

who could not be fired from the central bank until the end

of his 14-year term as a Fed governor (and could not easily

be removed as chairman until the end of the 4-year term for

that post).

Ch03.indd 69 19/05/14 11:26 PM

Page 81: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Understanding the Macro Economy

70

It is precisely for this reason that most monetary economists

prefer that central banks be “independent”—independent of the

short-term democratic process and, to a significant extent, inde-

pendent of politicians and politics altogether. Because fighting

inflation can inflict so much pain on the public in the short run,

elected politicians are often not very credible inflation fighters.

Although it is always difficult for those in power to cede control

over monetary policy to an independent central bank, which

could very well undercut political incumbents by raising interest

rates at election time, most developed nations have long since

taken the plunge—and a growing number of developing nations

have done the same. In the United States, the Federal Reserve

was not truly independent when it was created in 1913, but it

gained additional autonomy as a result of legislation in 1935 and

achieved essentially full independence in 1951. The Bank of

England, one of the world’s oldest central banks, dating back to

the seventeenth century, was not made operationally indepen-

dent until 1997.2

Although controlling inflation is normally regarded as the

responsibility of central banks, sometimes inflation becomes so

virulent that policy makers outside the central bank feel com-

pelled to take matters into their own hands. One extreme

approach, which clearly lies outside the domain of central bank-

ing, involves the imposition of wage and price controls. If policy

makers conclude that high inflation is being driven mainly by

inflationary expectations, then wage and price controls may look

like an attractive way to change expectations and thus break the

inflationary spiral. Why would anyone expect prices to increase

over subsequent months and years if the government had

declared all price increases to be illegal?

There are at least two potential problems with this approach,

however. First, it is unlikely to work unless the government is

Ch03.indd 70 19/05/14 11:26 PM

Page 82: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Expectations

71

absolutely credible in its commitment to maintain the controls as

long as necessary and to punish violators. Second, and even

more important, rigid wage and price controls inevitably create

distortions in the economy, thus reducing overall efficiency.

When the supply of a good, such as oil, declines, its price nor-

mally rises, signaling producers to produce more and consumers

to conserve on its use, to find substitutes, or simply to be pre-

pared to pay more. If the government prohibits the price from

rising, however, buyers will continue to consume oil exactly as

they had before until it runs out, leaving others with no access to

oil at all. Price controls, in other words, can potentially be effec-

tive in shaping expectations, but are often poorly executed and,

even when well executed, can wreak all sorts of economic havoc

along the way.

One reason why, despite these pitfalls, governments some-

times turn to radical solutions such as price controls is that cen-

tral banks themselves often find entrenched inflationary

expectations extremely difficult to reverse. An obvious solution

would simply be to cut back on money growth, starving the

inflationary engine of the fuel it needs to run. Unfortunately,

since high inflation brings high money demand, an attempt to

reduce money supply sharply could potentially send interest

rates skyrocketing and thus provoke a severe economic contrac-

tion. Imagine barreling down the track in a race car at 100 miles

per hour and then suddenly throwing the transmission into

reverse. Although the car would indeed slow down, its decelera-

tion would likely be rather violent.3

Over the past two-and-a-half decades, many central banks

around the world have adopted a strategy of inflation targeting.

They pick (and often announce) a specific inflation target—

say, 2 percent—and then raise and lower interest rates as nec-

essary to keep inflation at (or near) that target level. One of the

Ch03.indd 71 19/05/14 11:26 PM

Page 83: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Understanding the Macro Economy

72

many attractions of inflation targeting is that it may prevent an

economy from ever falling into an inflationary spiral. If the

central bank can be absolutely credible in its commitment to

beat back any modicum of inflation above its target, then it

may never have to worry about fighting a raging inflation

because one should never arise. So long as a policy of inflation

targeting remains credible, inflationary expectations—and

thus inflation itself—should always remain in check. This, at

least, is the theory.

Until the financial crisis of 2007–2009, many

inflation-targeting programs appeared remarkably effective.

During the financial crisis, however, officials at the US Federal

Reserve seemed willing to depart somewhat from inflation tar-

geting, making financial stability their top priority. The

European Central Bank, by contrast, remained more faithful to

strict inflation targeting—at least through 2011. The differing

strategies pursued by the Fed and the ECB can be thought of

as a grand natural experiment that future economists may look

back on in evaluating the best approach to monetary policy,

particularly during a crisis.

A related question, which has not yet been tested, is how cen-

tral bankers who are committed to inflation targeting would

react to a major supply shock—such as another oil shock, remi-

niscent of the 1970s. If inflationary expectations began to rise,

would central bankers be willing to induce high unemployment

in order to stem the tide? Would they hold the anti-inflation line,

or would they falter? Whatever the answer, there is no question

that the job of the central bankers would prove a great deal easier

if people believed absolutely that the central bank would hold the

line. Expectations, in other words, remain paramount in deter-

mining the effectiveness of monetary policy and, ultimately, the

trajectory of prices.

Ch03.indd 72 19/05/14 11:26 PM

Page 84: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Expectations

73

Expectations and Output

Of course, expectations can affect real output as well. The French

economist J. B. Say posited in the early nineteenth century that

supply creates its own demand—a dictum that has become

known as Say’s law.4 Since production generates income equal to

the full value of the product that is sold, total income should

always be sufficient to buy all the output that is produced.

Unfortunately, negative expectations sometimes intrude on this

happy circle of production and consumption. If individuals

anticipate bad times ahead, they may hold back on their expen-

diture, including both consumption and investment, thus open-

ing up a gap between potential GDP (i.e., feasible supply) and

actual GDP (effective demand).

The archetypal downward spiral is the result: as nervous con-

sumers decide to save more and spend less, firms lay off workers

and reduce new investment so as not to produce goods and ser-

vices that cannot be sold; rising unemployment depresses income,

which further undercuts demand and thus continues and intensi-

fies the downward spiral. Although productive capacity still

exists, output falls as productive resources—both people and

equipment—are left idle in the face of collapsing demand. Keynes

referred to this as the “paradox of poverty in the midst of plenty.”5

Monetary Policy

One potential strategy for countering such a decline in demand

involves expansionary monetary policy. To revive consumption

and especially investment, the central bank may decide to lower

interest rates (presumably by expanding the money supply).

A lower rate of interest may encourage consumption by making

Ch03.indd 73 19/05/14 11:26 PM

Page 85: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Understanding the Macro Economy

74

saving appear less attractive (since it now pays less) and—what

is essentially the same thing—by reducing the cost of consumer

borrowing. Similarly, from a business standpoint, a lower inter-

est rate may encourage investment by making new plant and

equipment cheaper to finance. In terms of net present value, a

lower discount (interest) rate will increase the NPV for any given

stream of earnings, thus enticing business managers to recon-

sider investment proposals that had been seen as nonstarters at a

higher rate of interest.

Some economists have worried, however, that under suffi-

ciently extreme circumstances, even aggressive monetary policy

might not provide enough stimulus to get a deteriorating econ-

omy out of its funk. Keynes speculated that new investment

might not look attractive at any realistic interest rate when

expectations of future demand were severely depressed.

Keynes also suggested that central bankers might not be able

to push interest rates as low as they would like—that is, low

enough to stimulate new investment—because of the existence of

a “liquidity trap.” At a certain point, when interest rates were very

low but still above zero, individuals might decide that holding

money was more desirable than holding any other asset (since

other assets might now be perceived as no longer paying enough

interest to compensate for their additional risk). The more money

the central bank pushed into the economy, the more money peo-

ple would want to hold. With money demand now rising in tan-

dem with money supply, interest rates would stop falling, even as

the central bank injected ever larger amounts of money into the

economic system. As some economists have described it, pushing

more money at this point is about as effective as “pushing on a

string.” Although the notion of a liquidity trap remains contro-

versial, it nevertheless suggests one means by which monetary

policy could be rendered impotent in a depression.

Ch03.indd 74 19/05/14 11:26 PM

Page 86: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Expectations

75

Another potential constraint on expansionary monetary policy

is the prospect of deflation. In a bad recession or depression,

prices may fall as a result of declining demand. Falling prices can

in turn exert perverse effects on the cost of borrowing. Even if

the nominal rate of interest is somehow brought all the way to

zero, the real rate of interest will remain positive and potentially

even very high if deflation is severe. This is because when prices

are falling, a dollar next year will buy more goods and services

than the same dollar buys this year. For a borrower, this means

that repaying a loan—even one with a nominal interest rate of

zero—will be costly in terms of actual goods and services.

(See table 3-1.)

This is precisely what borrowers experienced in the United

States in the early 1930s. By 1932, many nominal interest rates

had fallen to fantastically low levels. The average interest rate on

three-month government bonds, for example, had reached

0.88 percent. Still, real rates remained extremely high, since

deflation was estimated at about 10 percent that year. The

Federal Reserve, meanwhile, kept the discount rate higher than

one might have expected (between 2.5 and 3.5 percent in 1932),

in large measure to maintain the nation’s gold standard. Nominal

interest rates for business borrowers also remained relatively

TABLE 3-1

Real interest rates under conditions of deflation

Real interest rate » Nominal interest rate − Expected inflation

Since deflation is simply negative inflation:

Real interest rate » Nominal interest rate + Expected deflation

Therefore, if one expects deflation (falling prices), the real interest rate will be positive even if the nominal interest rate is zero.

Example: If the nominal interest rate is 0.5% and expected deflation is 10%, then the real interest rate is approximately (0.5% + 10%), or 10.5%.

Ch03.indd 75 19/05/14 11:26 PM

Page 87: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Understanding the Macro Economy

76

high during the early 1930s, presumably in part because of the

discount rate but also perhaps to compensate for the additional

risk of default stemming from the Depression. In fact, the rates

that banks charged on business loans in US cities averaged nearly

5 percent in 1932. This implies that the real interest rate on

business loans was about 15 percent, which may help to explain

why business borrowing (and private investment) fell sharply at

this time.6

Ideally, monetary policy would be managed in such a way as

to prevent extreme deflation from ever taking hold in the first

place. But many macroeconomists believe that once deflation of

this magnitude becomes a reality, monetary policy is rendered

virtually useless to turn things around.

Fiscal Policy

Another macroeconomic tool government officials have at their

disposal is fiscal policy, which rests on government spending,

taxation, and budget deficits. Keynes reasoned that if an econ-

omy was faltering because expectations of future demand were

gloomy, the government could signal better times ahead and

thus begin to get things moving again by spending more than it

received in taxes and thus running a large budget deficit. As

individuals and firms saw the government aggressively creating

new demand (by buying goods and services itself), their expec-

tations about the future would turn brighter and they them-

selves might begin spending again. In this way, the vicious spiral

that had taken the economy down could be reversed to bring the

economy back up to full employment. The key role for

government, according to Keynes and his followers, was to coor-

dinate expectations in a favorable direction through expansion-

ary fiscal policy.7

Ch03.indd 76 19/05/14 11:26 PM

Page 88: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Expectations

77

Keynes himself described the mechanism in terms of an

income “multiplier.” Because he believed that a burst of deficit

spending by the government would lead both consumption and

investment to rise, Keynes concluded that national income (or

GDP) would increase by more than the original increase in

government spending.

To understand this, we need to return to the GDP– expenditure

identity we saw near the beginning of chapter 1. Recall:

GDP = C + I + G + EX − IM,

where C is consumption, I is investment, G is government

spending, EX is exports, and IM is imports. Clearly, if G rises

without causing any other variable to fall (Keynes called this an

“autonomous” increase in government spending), then GDP has

to rise. This is why Keynes focused on deficit spending. Had the

government financed increased spending through additional

taxes, then consumption and investment may have fallen in the

face of higher tax rates. But if the government financed the addi-

tional spending through a deficit—that is, if it borrowed the

additional funds by issuing bonds—then no other expenditure

variable would have to decline.

Naturally, if this initial effect were the only effect, then GDP

would merely rise by the amount of the autonomous increase in

government spending, and Keynes’s income multiplier would

equal 1 (i.e., the change in GDP would equal 1 times the change

in government spending). But Keynesians believe that as GDP

rises, individuals and businesses will increase their levels of con-

sumption and investment, thus driving GDP still higher. In fact,

this dynamic will repeat itself again and again, as new consump-

tion and investment cause GDP to rise, which in turn encourages

still more consumption and investment, and so on.

Ch03.indd 77 19/05/14 11:26 PM

Page 89: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Understanding the Macro Economy

78

For convenience, imagine that the effect worked only through

consumption. Suppose further that households consumed

80 percent of every new dollar of income and saved the rest. In

this case, if the government initiated an additional $100 in defi-

cit spending, the first-round effect would be for GDP (national

income) to rise by $100. Faced with an additional $100 of

income, households would spend 80 percent of it, or $80, which

would thus increase GDP by another $80. Now, with another

$80 of income, households would spend 80 percent of it, or $64,

which would again increase GDP by the same amount. So far,

GDP would have increased by $244 (i.e., $100 + $80 + $64),

based on the government’s original $100 in deficit spending. But

the process wouldn’t end there. The virtuous circle would con-

tinue to go round and round and round, and GDP would con-

tinue to rise, with each increment of growth equal to 80 percent

of the one before (i.e., $100 + $80 + $64 + $51.20 + $40.96 +

$32.77 + $26.21 + …). Eventually, the increments would

become too small to matter. In the meantime, however, GDP

would have grown by about $500. (See figure 3-1.) Keynes noted

that the whole process can be boiled down to the following

formula:

Change in GDP = (Change in deficit spending by

government) × Income multiplier,

where the income multiplier = (1/proportion leakage from the

income–expenditure cycle). In this case, since the proportion of

leakage (that is, the amount of new income not spent) equals

20 percent (or 0.20), the income multiplier equals 1/0.20,

or 5. Thus:

Change in GDP = $100 × 5 = $500.

Ch03.indd 78 19/05/14 11:26 PM

Page 90: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Expectations

79

This analysis suggests that an increase in deficit spending will

increase nominal GDP. In the example given, the increase in GDP

is 5 times as large as the original increase in deficit spending,

since leakage is only 20 percent and the income multiplier is

therefore equal to 5. What is not clear, however, is whether the

increase in nominal GDP will come mainly from an increase in

the price level (P) or from an increase in the quantity of output

(Q). Recall that nominal GDP depends on both of these vari-

ables, since nominal GDP = P × Q.

Keynes believed that in times of high unemployment, the

increase would come mainly from the quantity of output (that is,

mainly from an increase in real GDP). In a depression, with many

productive resources lying idle, the first thing business managers

would do in the face of increased demand would be to put idle

resources back to work. They would rehire workers, turn equip-

ment back on, and bring their factories back to life. As a result of

all this, production (real GDP) would increase toward the

economy’s potential.

spending. But the process wouldn’t end there. The virtuous

circle would continue to go round and round and round, and

GDP would continue to rise, with each increment of growth

equal to 80 percent of the one before (i.e., $100 + $80 + $64 +

$51.20 + $40.96 + $32.77 + $26.21 + . . .). Eventually, the incre-

ments would become too small to matter. In the meantime, how-

ever, GDP would have grown by about $500. (See figure 3-1.)

Keynes noted that the whole process can be boiled down to the

following formula:

Change in GDP = (Change in deficit spending

by government) × Income multiplier,

where the income multiplier = (1/proportion leakage from the

income–expenditure cycle). In this case, since the proportion

of leakage (that is, the amount of new income not spent) equals

Understanding the Macro Economy

78

F I G U R E 3 - 1

Illustration of Keynesian income multiplier

Illustration is based on $100 increase in government deficit spending and leakage of 20%.

GDP = C + I + G + EX – IM

+ 100

+ 80 +80

+ 64 +64

:

:

+ 100

∆GDP = +500

Moss_03_67to84 4/12/07 1:56 PM Page 78

FIGURE 3 -1

IIIustration of Keynesian income multiplier

Ch03.indd 79 19/05/14 11:26 PM

Page 91: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Understanding the Macro Economy

80

Eventually, however, if the government kept running large

budget deficits even after all or most of the previously idle

resources had been put back to work, business managers would

respond to increased demand simply by raising prices. This is

because it would be difficult for them to ramp up production any

further. Nominal GDP would still rise, but now the increase

would be coming mainly from an increase in the price level (P),

not from an increase in the quantity of output (Q). Economists

would say that in this latter scenario, actual GDP (demand)

exceeded potential (supply) and that the economy was

overheating.8 (See figure 3-2.)

Keynes’s proposal to stimulate GDP through deficit spending

was thus intended for periods of economic contraction, when

real GDP was severely depressed. During more normal times,

deficit spending was expected to be inflationary.

Although there were plenty of skeptics in the early days,

Keynes’s ideas received a big boost from America’s experience

during World War II. Since the United States finally pulled out of

would say that in this latter scenario, actual GDP (demand) ex-

ceeded potential (supply) and that the economy was overheating.8

(See figure 3-2.)

Keynes’s proposal to stimulate GDP through deficit spending

was thus intended for periods of economic contraction, when

real GDP was severely depressed. During more normal times,

deficit spending was expected to be inflationary.

Although there were plenty of skeptics in the early days,

Keynes’s ideas received a big boost from America’s experience

during World War II. Since the United States finally pulled out of

its long depression during the war, and since the war effort in-

volved extraordinary levels of deficit spending, Keynes’s predic-

tion that deficit spending would revive the economy appeared to

have been confirmed. Keynesianism spread rapidly among aca-

demic economists and ultimately became highly influential in

policy circles as well. In fact, President Richard Nixon is said to

have declared in early 1972, “We are all Keynesians now.”

Understanding the Macro Economy

80

F I G U R E 3 - 2

Keynesian fiscal stimulus, in good times and bad

↑ Government ↑ Demand ↑ Nominal GDP (P × Q), budget deficit via income multiplier

In periods of high unemployment:

↑ Government ↑ Demand ↑ Q (increase in real GDP) [recovery] budget deficit

In periods of full employment:

↑ Government ↑ Demand ↑ P (inflation) [overheating] budget deficit

In normal times (modest unemployment):

↑ Government ↑ Demand ↑ Q & ↑ P (both real GDP and budget deficit inflation rise)

Moss_03_67to84 4/12/07 1:56 PM Page 80

Ch03.indd 80 19/05/14 11:26 PM

Page 92: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Expectations

81

its long depression during the war, and since the war effort

involved extraordinary levels of deficit spending, Keynes’s pre-

diction that deficit spending would revive the economy appeared

to have been confirmed. Keynesianism spread rapidly among

academic economists and ultimately became highly influential in

policy circles as well. In fact, President Richard Nixon is said to

have declared in early 1972, “We are all Keynesians now.”

Faith in Keynesian deficit spending appears to have waned

since its heyday in the 1960s and early 1970s. In fact, there are

good reasons to believe that deficit spending may not always

deliver as much bang for the buck as many people once learned

in their economics classes in college. One reason, as we have

seen, is that deficit spending may prove to be inflationary, lead-

ing to an increase in prices rather than output. But there are

other reasons as well.

In the illustration of the income multiplier given previously,

the only leakage was household savings. Because this leakage

was just 20 percent, the income multiplier was 5. In most times

and places, however, the true income multiplier is probably not

nearly that large. In part, this is because there are other leakages

besides savings. Taxes represent an additional leakage, as do

imports, since spending on foreign goods does not contribute to

domestic GDP.

Some economists, moreover, point to another form of leakage,

under the heading “rational expectations.” The argument here is

that if individuals are perfectly rational, they should anticipate

that budget deficits eventually will require higher taxes to pay off

the accumulated debt. If individuals wish to prepare for these

looming taxes, then they might save every dollar of new income

derived from deficit spending, thus causing a leakage of

100 percent and driving the multiplier down to 1. Since the

underlying idea for this mechanism stems from the

Ch03.indd 81 19/05/14 11:26 PM

Page 93: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Understanding the Macro Economy

82

nineteenth-century economist David Ricardo, it has come to be

called “Ricardian equivalence.”

Another problem is that deficit spending may drive up inter-

est rates and undercut private investment and consumption—a

phenomenon known as “crowding out.” When the government

runs a budget deficit, spending more than it collects in taxes, it

obtains the difference by borrowing on the open market. It

issues government bonds and auctions them off to the highest

bidders. In doing this, the government is competing with pri-

vate borrowers for funds. Naturally, competition for investment

funds will drive up the price of these funds, meaning that the

interest rate will rise. As this occurs, some potential borrowers

in the private sector—including both firms and individuals—

may decide not to borrow at the higher rates and simply scuttle

the projects they were planning to pursue. Recall that Keynes

wanted the increase in government spending to be

autonomous—that is, not associated with a reduction in any

other form of expenditure (such as consumption or investment).

Unfortunately, higher interest rates may cause both consump-

tion and investment to decline, which means that crowding out

can reduce—or, in the extreme, even eliminate—the effective-

ness of Keynesian deficit spending.

A related issue is that the central bank may itself react to an

increase in deficit spending by raising interest rates. Specifically,

if central bankers expect the increased budget deficit to be infla-

tionary, they may try to counteract it (and thus preempt the

expected inflation) through tighter monetary policy. Once again,

such a reaction on the part of the central bank would reduce or

negate the stimulative effect of deficit spending.

Nevertheless, despite all of these qualifications and criticisms,

most macroeconomists still believe that a small income multi-

plier does exist. When national economies fall into recession,

Ch03.indd 82 19/05/14 11:26 PM

Page 94: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Expectations

83

moreover, most policy makers are still quick to run budget defi-

cits in the hope of getting things back on track (as they did in the

United States and in numerous other countries during the finan-

cial crisis of 2007–2009 and the ensuing economic slowdown).

Sometimes these deficits are based on increased spending, some-

times on tax cuts, and sometimes—indeed, most often—on a

combination of the two. Either way, a key goal is to stimulate

aggregate demand by signaling that brighter days are ahead. If

the public interprets the deficit as a sign of weakness rather than

strength, the economy may continue to deteriorate. But if—as

Keynes hoped—the public interprets the additional burst of

expenditure as a good sign, the economy may very well revive on

the basis of improved expectations. In a market economy, expec-

tations can literally drive reality, and Keynesian fiscal policy is all

about expectations.

Expectations and Other Macro Variables

Not surprisingly, expectations strongly influence other macro-

economic variables as well, including interest rates and exchange

rates. If, for instance, a bond trader expects interest rates to rise,

she might decide to sell bonds in order to avoid taking a capital

loss (since existing bonds generally depreciate in value when

the interest rate rises). If a large number of traders follow the

same course, long-term interest rates will in fact rise as a result.

The sales will drive bond prices down and bond yields (their

effective interest rates) up.9 For this reason, bond markets often

anticipate action by the central bank, pushing bond yields (and

thus interest rates) up when they expect the central bank to

tighten monetary policy and pushing them down when they

expect the central bank to loosen.

Ch03.indd 83 19/05/14 11:26 PM

Page 95: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Understanding the Macro Economy

84

Similarly, currency traders drive exchange rates up and down

on the basis of expectations. If they expect the euro to appreci-

ate, for example, they buy euros (or sell dollars). If they expect

the euro to depreciate, they sell euros (or buy dollars). Either

way, their expectation actually drives the result. In some cases,

they base their expectation on news about macroeconomic data.

A dramatic increase in the US trade deficit, for instance, might

lead currency traders to sell dollars, if they think the mounting

trade deficit makes it more likely that the dollar will depreciate.

At other times, traders may be influenced by policy actions. If

currency traders expect the Federal Reserve to tighten monetary

policy, they are likely to buy dollars, believing that a higher inter-

est rate will make the dollar more attractive and thus cause it to

appreciate.

Finally, a word of warning: although expectations are obvi-

ously very powerful, one should not conclude from this discus-

sion that they are all that matter. If expectations are fundamentally

out of line with reality, they will ultimately be dashed. When, in

the 1990s, American investors expected unprecedented perfor-

mance from internet companies, they rushed out to buy internet

stocks and dramatically bid up their prices. Eventually, however,

when it became clear that the original expectations were over-

blown, the prices of internet stocks plummeted (i.e., the bubble

burst) and many internet investors experienced a tough dose of

reality. A similar, but even more devastating, boom and bust

occurred in the United States less than a decade later, when reck-

less subprime mortgage lending and securitization—based in

large part on expectations of ever-increasing housing prices—

contributed to a massive real estate bubble, which ultimately

precipitated the financial crisis of 2007–2009.

Ch03.indd 84 19/05/14 11:26 PM

Page 96: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Expectations

85

Expectations can thus affect the macro economy as a whole.

Positive expectations may help bring a depressed economy back

up to its potential. But once that potential is reached and the

nation’s industries are back up to full capacity, further euphoria

will only produce inflation or a bubble, not a further acceleration

of real growth. Expectations matter a great deal, but they are not

all that matter. Ultimately, economic expectations cannot survive

for long outside the confines of economic reality, as dictated by

the technical limits of production over time.

Ch03.indd 85 19/05/14 11:26 PM

Page 97: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Ch03.indd 86 19/05/14 11:26 PM

Page 98: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

II

Selected Topics

Background and Mechanics

Ch04.indd 87 19/05/14 11:29 PM

Page 99: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Ch04.indd 88 19/05/14 11:29 PM

Page 100: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

89

C H A P T E R F O U R

A Short History of Money and

Monetary Policy in the

United States

In an attempt to link theory with practice, this chapter offers a

brief monetary history of the United States, from the original cre-

ation of the US dollar in the late eighteenth century to the execu-

tion of modern monetary policy in the early twenty-first. This

history illustrates many of the macroeconomic principles and

relationships highlighted in the previous chapters (especially

chapter 2), and locates them in context, against the backdrop of

a maturing national economy. Ideally, you should be able to see

monetary economics at work all along the way.

Ch04.indd 89 19/05/14 11:29 PM

Page 101: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Selected Topics—Background and Mechanics

90

Defining the Unit of Account and the Price of Money

In establishing a new country, one of the first things government

officials have to do is define a unit of account—that is, a stan-

dard metric for accounting and transaction purposes. The dollar

is the unit of account in the United States. In the nation’s earli-

est days, US policy makers defined the value of the dollar in

terms of precious metals. The Continental Congress unani-

mously resolved in 1785 that “the money unit of the United

States be one dollar.”1 The following year, the Board of Treasury

announced that the “Money Unit or Dollar will contain” 375.64

grains of fine silver.2 This definition was modified slightly after

ratification of the new Constitution a couple years later.

The Coinage Act of 1792 set the dollar equal to 371.25 grains of

fine silver, or an equivalent value in gold (24.75 grains of

fine gold).3

In these early years, the US government didn’t produce much

money itself—mostly just silver and gold coins. Commercial

banks produced paper notes that looked official (much like

today’s government-issued currency) and could be redeemed for

coins. Interestingly, these privately issued bank notes functioned

as the most common form of money through the early part of the

nineteenth century. Later, checking accounts—which econo-

mists call demand deposits—became increasingly important.

Individuals and firms established accounts at local banks (either

by depositing coins and bank notes or by taking out loans) and

then could write checks on the accounts to pay for things they

purchased from vendors or to withdraw funds from the bank

itself, either in the form of coins or bank notes.

By comparison with today, the most striking thing about the

government’s role in the monetary system during these early

years is how limited it was. The federal government did little

Ch04.indd 90 19/05/14 11:29 PM

Page 102: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

A Short History of Money and Monetary Policy in the United States

91

with respect to monetary policy other than to define the value of

the dollar (in terms of gold and silver) and to mint coins. There

was no central bank in the United States for most of the

nineteenth century. As already noted, paper money was issued

mostly by private banks.

Nevertheless, by defining the value of the dollar, the federal

government had done something extremely important: it had set

a fixed exchange rate. This meant that the price of the dollar

would remain stable over time relative to gold and silver—as

well as to other currencies, such as the British pound, that were

similarly fixed against precious metals. The nation’s bimetallic

standard (based on gold and silver) evolved into a straight gold

standard over the nineteenth century.

The Gold Standard: A Self-Regulating Mechanism?

Although many observers today regard a fixed exchange rate as a

heavy-handed form of government intervention, it started out as

precisely the opposite. Indeed, a fixed exchange rate (against

gold and silver) was the least invasive thing the government

could do, short of refusing to create any common unit of account

or medium of exchange whatsoever.

Even in the absence of a central bank, the fixed exchange rate

was supposed to keep the whole economic system in balance—

and to do so automatically. If the domestic economy began to

overheat and the country experienced inflation (rising prices),

imports would increase (because foreign prices would immedi-

ately look more attractive than domestic ones) and exports

would fall (for the same reason). As the trade balance deterio-

rated, precious metals would presumably flow out of the coun-

try, since it was often assumed that international traders paid for

their purchases with gold and silver. Because the domestic

Ch04.indd 91 19/05/14 11:29 PM

Page 103: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Selected Topics—Background and Mechanics

92

money supply was tied directly to these precious metals, it was

expected to fall as domestic reserves of precious metals declined.

A declining money supply, in turn, would help to rein in prices,

thus counteracting the original inflationary surge. Conversely, if

prices fell at home and the country experienced deflation, the

balance of trade would improve, gold would flow in, the money

supply would increase, and prices would be pushed back up to

an appropriate level. This, at least, is how the self-adjusting

mechanism was supposed to work.

In practice, however, the system did not always come back

into balance very rapidly. Tying the dollar rigidly to gold didn’t

ensure price stability because the quantity of gold—and thus the

price of gold—was itself unstable. Through most of the 1880s

and 1890s, as the world’s gold supply barely inched forward, the

overall price level fell in the United States. Since the price of gold

was rising (because of its scarcity), the prices of almost every-

thing else (in terms of gold) were falling. Believing that this

ongoing deflation was strangling the economy, presidential can-

didate William Jennings Bryan urged monetary reform in 1896,

declaring, “You shall not crucify mankind upon a cross of gold.”

Ironically, the world was just then on the verge of a dramatic

increase in gold supply. The price level began rising the follow-

ing year and continued upward for more than a decade.4

By 1913, one of the nation’s leading economists, Irving Fisher,

was so frustrated with the instability of prices that he proposed a

radical reform, which he called “standardizing the dollar.” As

gold fell in price relative to other goods, the gold content of the

dollar was to be proportionately increased, so that the dollar

would remain stable relative to other goods. Conversely, when

gold increased in price relative to other goods, he suggested, the

gold content of the dollar should be proportionately reduced,

again to ensure the stability of the dollar relative to other goods.

Ch04.indd 92 19/05/14 11:29 PM

Page 104: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

A Short History of Money and Monetary Policy in the United States

93

This way, the dollar would never waver in value, and the overall

price level (and thus the cost of living) would be stabilized. As

Fisher himself explained his proposal, “It aims merely … to con-

vert our dollar into a fixed yardstick of purchasing power.”5

The Creation of the Federal Reserve

Although the government did not adopt Fisher’s proposal, major

monetary reform was indeed just around the corner. A serious

banking panic in 1907 had convinced economists and policy

makers alike that a new institution was required, one that would

have the power to issue currency at will. In 1914, the Federal

Reserve, America’s central bank (“the Fed”), was established. Its

creators hoped that it would satisfy seasonal demands for money

and could serve as a lender of last resort to commercial banks in

times of financial distress.

In prior years, interest rates had often swung wildly in

response to changing seasonal demands for money, and they fre-

quently had surged to dizzying heights during financial panics.

Since the supply of money was so inflexible—tied rigidly to the

quantity of gold—changes in money demand (at harvest time,

for example) could cause dramatic changes in interest rates.

The establishment of the Fed was supposed to solve this prob-

lem by creating a more “elastic” money supply. When money

demand surged, the Fed could simply issue more currency to

help satisfy it; when demand declined, the Fed could issue less.

Initially, the Fed relied mainly on its discount window to inject

cash into—or withdraw cash from—the economy, setting the

discount rate low when it wanted commercial banks to borrow

liberally (so as to increase the money supply) and setting it high

when it wanted them to borrow less (and therefore slow or

Ch04.indd 93 19/05/14 11:29 PM

Page 105: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Selected Topics—Background and Mechanics

94

reverse money growth). In this way, it was thought, the Fed

could help smooth the business cycle.

Although the Fed had discretion over how much money to

create, it did not have unlimited room to maneuver. The law

required that the Fed keep a gold reserve equal to at least 40 per-

cent of the currency it issued and that it freely exchange gold for

currency at the long-standing rate of $20.67 per ounce. This

meant that if currency traders ever believed that too much cur-

rency had been issued—such that a dollar was no longer worth

its weight in gold, so to speak—they would aggressively trade

their dollars for gold at the Fed. As soon as its gold reserve

threatened to fall below the 40 percent requirement, the Fed

would be forced to raise its discount rate in order to contract the

money supply and make the dollar more attractive. The gold

standard thus continued to be seen as a crucial source of disci-

pline—a necessary check on monetary excess and a powerful

weapon against inflation.

By the early 1930s, however, many analysts had concluded

that the gold standard was exerting too much discipline. Even as

the economy fell into the Great Depression and unemployment

soared, the Fed was reluctant to lower its discount rate too far—

and even raised the rate in 1931—so as to avoid sparking a run

on its gold reserve. Had William Jennings Bryan still been alive,

he likely would have reiterated his charge that America was

being crucified “on a cross of gold.”

President Franklin Roosevelt sharply curtailed the gold stan-

dard in 1933, requiring private citizens to turn in their gold (other

than jewelry), ending the practice of exchanging gold for cur-

rency at banks, and declaring gold clauses in all contracts to be

void. He also depreciated the dollar relative to gold, raising the

official gold price from $20.67 to $35 per ounce. One Harvard

Business School professor, Arthur Dewing, was so upset about

Ch04.indd 94 19/05/14 11:29 PM

Page 106: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

A Short History of Money and Monetary Policy in the United States

95

this that he initially refused to turn in his gold and (some say)

nearly went to jail in protest.6 Although a modified international

gold standard was restored after World War II, it eventually fell

out of favor as well and was dropped for good in the early 1970s.

The dollar was thus left to float on international currency markets.

Finding the Right Monetary Rule under a Floating Exchange Rate

With the dollar no longer fixed against gold or any major cur-

rency, the key question for officials at the Federal Reserve was

how to decide how much money to create. Indeed, monetary

economists continually wrestled with this question. Because they

kept coming up with new ideas—or, at least, kept rediscovering

old ones—“preferred” monetary rules came and went, like fads.

Some economists, following Milton Friedman, favored placing

M1 money supply on a controlled upward growth path—of, say,

3 to 5 percent every year—to stabilize the price level and ensure

a healthy growth rate of real GDP.* Others sought to issue just

enough money to stabilize interest rates at low levels—again to

* Those who favored this approach and endorsed the assumptions that lay behind it were known as monetarists. A favorite identity of monetarists is:

M × V = P × Q,

where M is the money supply, V is the velocity of money (which may be thought of as the speed at which money circulates in the economy), P is the price level (or deflator), and Q is quantity of output (real GDP). Assuming that V was fairly stable (a controversial assumption), monetarists concluded that the best way to ensure very low inflation and a healthy (and steady) growth rate of real GDP was to put the money supply on a steady upward path, at a rate of increase equal to the rate that economists expected (or hoped) real GDP would grow—say 4 percent per year.

Ch04.indd 95 19/05/14 11:29 PM

Page 107: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Selected Topics—Background and Mechanics

96

encourage growth without inflation. Still others thought low

unemployment should be the target—that more money should

be issued in order to lower interest rates and stimulate the econ-

omy whenever unemployment was rising.

Although the Fed never explicitly committed to any of these

monetary rules, it seemed to experiment with several of them. Most

of these rules, however, were ultimately discredited by the high

inflation of the 1970s and the financial tumult of the early 1980s.

By the 1990s, although the Fed still refused to commit to a specific

monetary rule, a rough consensus had emerged among many mon-

etary economists about the benefits of “inflation targeting.” The

basic idea was that central bankers should target a low and stable

inflation rate of, say, 2 percent—expanding the money supply

whenever inflation threatened to fall below the target and reducing

money growth whenever inflation threatened to rise above it.

In fact, in conceiving of how to achieve the inflation target,

most economists now focused more on the short-term interest

rate than on the money supply itself. Although the so-called dis-

count rate (the rate at which the Fed lent to commercial banks)

had long since been abandoned as an important monetary tool,

Fed officials had become extremely skilled at controlling one very

specific short-term interest rate through open market operations

(which involved the buying and selling of government securities

on the open market). The critical rate in question was the

so-called federal funds rate—the rate at which commercial banks

lent funds to each other overnight. The Federal Reserve could

move the federal funds rate just about anywhere it wanted—

usually with extraordinary accuracy—simply by pushing or pull-

ing on the money supply through open market operations.

Naturally, economists who favored inflation targeting believed

the Fed should raise the federal funds rate when inflation began

Ch04.indd 96 19/05/14 11:29 PM

Page 108: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

A Short History of Money and Monetary Policy in the United States

97

creeping above the target and decrease it when the opposite

occurred. Although the Fed would not say so publicly, many ana-

lysts believed it had been following an implicit inflation- targeting

strategy since the 1980s. The European Central Bank, meanwhile,

had adopted a more explicit strategy of inflation targeting to guide

its monetary policy.7 Although some critics charged that mone-

tary policy was too loose in one market or too tight in the other,

inflation had—as of 2013—remained well under control in both

the United States and the European Union for nearly two decades.

Inflation targeting was tested, however, during the financial

crisis of 2007–2009 and the subsequent sovereign debt crisis in

Europe. Whereas the Federal Reserve aggressively eased mone-

tary policy as the financial crisis took hold, even in the face of

inflation that exceeded 4 percent in late 2007 and much of 2008,

officials at the European Central Bank appeared more sensitive to

the inflation rate, in accordance with their legal mandate to tar-

get inflation. In fact, as late as July 2008, the ECB actually raised

its short-term interest rate from 4 to 4.25 percent, apparently in

response to several recent increases in monthly inflation. By this

time in the United States, the Fed—deeply concerned about the

continuing financial turmoil—had already reduced its target

interest rate to 2 percent and would essentially bring the rate

down to zero by mid-December 2008. Although the ECB had

begun reducing its short-term rate in October, it moved neither

as far nor as fast as the Fed, and it again began raising its target

rate in April 2011 (following a slight increase in inflation in

March), even as a serious sovereign debt crisis was taking hold

across Europe. At the time of this writing, it is still too soon to

say whether one monetary strategy or the other will be judged

superior in retrospect. Early indications, however, give an edge

to the Federal Reserve, since by the end of 2013, the United States

Ch04.indd 97 19/05/14 11:29 PM

Page 109: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Selected Topics—Background and Mechanics

98

exhibited both low inflation and postcrisis economic growth

that, while lackluster, was significantly higher than in Europe.

The Transformation of American Monetary Policy

From the moment Congress declared the dollar to be the unit of

account in the United States back in the eighteenth century, it

became incumbent upon the government to manage money in

some way to make this declaration meaningful—to make the

dollar a reliable metric for transaction and accounting purposes.

Policy makers began by tying the dollar to precious metals at a

specified price. By setting the price of the dollar, the government

allowed its quantity to be determined by supply and demand in

the marketplace.

One way to think about how money and monetary policy

were transformed in the twentieth century—at least up through

the early 1980s—is to conceive of the government as gradually

shifting its strategy, from setting the price of the dollar (and let-

ting quantity vary) to setting its quantity (and letting price vary).

Milton Friedman’s proposal in the second half of the twentieth

century that the Federal Reserve simply aim for a steady rate of

growth in the quantity of money—roughly equal to the growth

of real GDP—can thus be thought of as the polar opposite of the

original gold standard.

Another—and far more comprehensive—way to think about

the transition over the twentieth century is that in setting monetary

policy, the government gradually shifted from targeting one price

of money (the exchange rate) to targeting another (the overall price

level). The goal was always to make the dollar a reliable metric of

value that would maximally grease the wheels of commerce with-

out inducing either inflation or deflation. But economists’

Ch04.indd 98 19/05/14 11:29 PM

Page 110: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

A Short History of Money and Monetary Policy in the United States

99

understanding of what constituted a reliable metric and how best

to grease the wheels of commerce changed significantly over time.

Early on, the gold standard was viewed as the best way to

ensure a reliable monetary metric, since it guaranteed that the

dollar would remain stable relative to gold. The gold standard

did not ensure, however, that the dollar would remain stable rel-

ative to other goods. As a result, the overall price level (a weighted

average of the prices of all goods) fluctuated quite considerably

as the price of gold itself rose and fell with seemingly random

changes in the global gold supply. Even supporters of the gold

standard recognized this problem. Professor E. W. Kemmerer of

Princeton declared in 1927:

There is probably no defect in the world’s economic

organization today more serious than the fact that we use as

our unit of value, not a thing with a fixed value, but a fixed

weight of gold with a widely varying value. In a little less than

a half century here in the United States, we have seen our

yardstick of value, namely, the value of the gold dollar, exhibit

the following gyrations: from 1879 to 1896 it rose [and thus

the overall price level fell] 27 percent. From 1896 to 1920 it

fell [and thus the overall price level rose] 70 percent. From

1920 to September, 1927, it rose [and thus the overall price

level fell] 56 percent. If, figuratively speaking, we say that the

yard-stick of value was thirty-six inches long in 1879 . . . then

it was forty-six inches long in 1896, thirteen and a half inches

long in 1920 and is twenty-one inches long today.8

As economists became convinced that the right thing to stabi-

lize was the purchasing power of the dollar relative to goods and

services in general (output), rather than to gold in particular,

monetary policy clearly had to change.

Ch04.indd 99 19/05/14 11:29 PM

Page 111: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Selected Topics—Background and Mechanics

100

Until the financial crisis of 2007–2009, the Federal Reserve

had for some time appeared to be following an implicit strategy

of inflation targeting, seeking to ensure that the value (or price)

of the dollar in terms of a broad basket of goods declined (i.e., the

price level rose) at a stable rate of about 2 percent per year.9 To

do this, it manipulated the quantity of money through open mar-

ket operations to set one price of money, the short-term interest

rate. It then pushed that rate up and down as needed to stabilize

the trajectory of another price of money, the overall price level.

Although officials at the Fed seemed to depart somewhat from

inflation targeting during the financial crisis, apparently con-

cluding that financial stability had to be the top priority to ensure

a healthy economy, the US central bank has perhaps already

returned—or will soon return—to an implicit policy of inflation

targeting as the worst of the crisis fades from view. If the policy is

successful, inflation should be kept at a modest and predictable

level, and the dollar should remain a reliable yardstick—not in

terms of how much gold it is worth, but of how much total output

it can buy.

Even in the context of money and monetary policy, therefore,

output remains absolutely central—the conceptual linchpin of

modern macroeconomic thought and practice.

Ch04.indd 100 19/05/14 11:29 PM

Page 112: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

101

C H A P T E R F I V E

The Fundamentals of

GDP Accounting

Because output lies at the heart of macroeconomics, considerable

attention has been devoted to the question of how best to

measure it. In fact, macroeconomists have developed a whole

accounting system precisely for this purpose. The goal of

national economic accounting—also known as GDP account-

ing—is to measure the value of all output a nation produces over

a particular period of time, typically a year. This chapter provides

a quick primer on GDP accounting and the essential challenges

and trade-offs involved in measuring national output.1

Page 113: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

102

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

Selected Topics—Background and Mechanics

Three Measurement Approaches

As noted in chapter 1, economists have devised three distinct

approaches for determining the value of total output, which

focus on value added, income, and expenditure.

Value added. Under the first approach, economists calculate

output by summing the value added at each stage of

production, where “value added” is defined simply as sales

revenue minus the cost of nonlabor inputs (i.e., inputs

purchased from other firms). The sum of all value added for

every good and service produced within a nation will equal

that nation’s total output, or GDP.

Income. Since the value added at each stage of production

must ultimately be allocated to members of the public in the

form of income, another way to calculate total output is to

measure total income. Specifically, the returns to an

economy’s productive factors—labor and capital—can be

calculated as the sum of wages and salaries, interest,

dividends, rent, and royalties. After a few adjustments

(including the addition of depreciation and indirect business

taxes), total income will exactly equal total output, or GDP.

Expenditure. Under the third approach, economists measure

the value of total output by calculating the nation’s spending

on final goods and services. A good or service is considered

final if it does not represent an input into the current

production of another good or service. For example, if an

individual buys coffee beans to grind and brew at home, they

constitute a final product, the value of which is counted in

GDP. But if a café purchases the beans, they are considered

intermediate goods and are not included in GDP. Including

Page 114: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

The Fundamentals of GDP Accounting

103

both the café’s purchase of coffee beans and its sales of

brewed coffee to the public would constitute double

counting, since the price of a cup of coffee includes the cost

of the beans.

Whichever method one chooses—value added, income, or

expenditure—the aim of GDP accounting is to estimate the value

of output, or product. As a consequence, transactions not associ-

ated with the production of new goods or services—such as gov-

ernment welfare payments, capital gains and losses, and the sale

of used goods—are excluded.2

The Nuts and Bolts of the Expenditure Method

Although all three methods for calculating GDP are correct (and

ultimately should produce the same result), the expenditure

approach—with its focus on final sales rather than value added

or income—is by far the most widely used of the three. It gained

ascendancy because of its perceived usefulness in macroeco-

nomic forecasting and policy making. As a result, the most com-

mon definition of GDP is simply the market value of all final

goods and services produced within a nation’s borders over a

given year.

As we have seen, the expenditure approach breaks spending

into four basic categories, the sum of which exactly equals

GDP. The four categories are household consumption,

investment, government expenditure, and net exports. (See

table 5-1.) Thus,

GDP = Consumption (C) + Investment (I) + Government

expenditure (G) + Net exports (EX – IM), where:

Page 115: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

104

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

Selected Topics—Background and Mechanics

• Consumption includes all household purchases of new

goods and services for current use.

• Investment includes expenditures that are intended to

increase future output of final goods and services.

It includes business spending on fixed structures,

equipment, intellectual property (such as software or

research and development), and inventory, as well as the

cost of new owner-occupied homes.3 Many countries

TABLE 5-1

Expenditure approach to GDP accounting, United States (2012)

Components of GDP (types of expenditure) Billions $ % of GDP

Personal consumption C $11,150 68.6%GoodsServices

7,3803,770

45.4%23.2%

Gross private domestic investment I $2,475 15.2%Fixed investment

NonresidentialStructuresEquipmentIntellectual property productsResidential

Change in private inventories

2,4091,970

43790862543966

14.8%12.1%2.7%5.6%3.8%2.7%0.4%

Government consumption and gross investment

G $3,167 19.5%

Government consumption (Gc)FederalState and local

Gross government investment (GI)FederalState and local

2,5481,0121,536

619284335

15.7%6.2%9.5%3.8%1.7%2.1%

Exports EX $2,196 13.5%GoodsServices

1,536660

9.5%4.1%

Imports IM $2,743 16.9%GoodsServices

2,295448

14.1%2.8%

Gross domestic product = C + I + G + (EX – IM) GDP $16,245 100.0%

Source: Data drawn from US Bureau of Economic Analysis.

Page 116: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

The Fundamentals of GDP Accounting

105

include government investment—such as spending on

new roads and bridges—in this category, but others

(including the United States) do not.

• Government expenditure includes government spending on

goods and services, at all levels of government (federal,

state, and local). It may or may not include government

spending on fixed capital stock, depending on how

government investment is classified (i.e., as government

expenditure or as investment). Under neither definition,

however, does government expenditure include transfer

payments—such as welfare and Social Security benefits—

since transfers are not associated with the production of

output.

• Net exports is simply the difference between exports and

imports. Exports are added to domestic expenditure

because they constitute domestic output, even though

they are purchased by foreigners. Imports, by contrast,

must be subtracted from domestic expenditure because

they are produced abroad and are thus not part of

domestic output.

In most cases, a single item may be categorized in a variety of

ways, depending on who purchases it and for what purpose.

Consider a coffeemaker, for example. A coffeemaker purchased

for home use is classified as household consumption, whereas

the same coffeemaker purchased for use in a café is classified as

investment. If a café in Italy purchases a coffeemaker made in

Seattle, this counts as a US export and is added to domestic

expenditure in calculating US GDP. Conversely, if a Seattle café

purchases a coffeemaker made in Italy, this expenditure counts

as domestic investment but also as an import, which is deducted

Page 117: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

106

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

Selected Topics—Background and Mechanics

from domestic expenditure. Because the investment (a plus) and

the import (a minus) cancel each other out, the imported coffee-

maker will exert no net effect on US GDP, which is appropriate

since no domestic production was involved.

Depreciation

It is important to remember that gross domestic product excludes

deductions for depreciation. Sometimes called “consumption of

fixed capital,” depreciation is formally defined as “the value of

wear and tear, obsolescence, accidental damage, and aging.”

(Returning to our coffeemaker example, a café’s coffeemaker

depreciates in value each year owing to wear and tear from brew-

ing coffee. This wear and tear may be thought of as an input, just

like the coffee beans used to make the coffee.) The US Commerce

Department’s official measure of depreciation also covers reduc-

tions of the capital stock stemming from disasters, such as hur-

ricanes and floods.4

If capital depreciation is very large across an entire economy,

even substantial levels of gross investment may not be sufficient

to support rapid growth over the long term. It is for this reason

that students of economic development often pay close attention

to net domestic product (NDP), which is GDP less depreciation.

NDP, or net output, essentially measures the amount of output

that can be consumed, leaving the capital stock intact.

In practice, GDP is used much more frequently than NDP. As

the Commerce Department explained back in 1947, net product

is “theoretically preferable…. It suffers, however, from the seri-

ous obstacle that there is no satisfactory operational definition of

the consumption of fixed capital.”5 Having decided that it was

Page 118: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

The Fundamentals of GDP Accounting

107

difficult to measure depreciation accurately, the Commerce

Department chose to emphasize gross rather than net product,

and has done so ever since (as have most other countries).

GDP versus GNP

Gross domestic product (GDP) measures the market value of all

final goods and services produced within a country’s borders

over a given year. By contrast, gross national product (GNP)

measures output produced by a country’s residents, regardless of

where they produce it.

When Toyota manufactures automobiles at a plant located in

the United States, the value of this output is factored into US

GDP in precisely the same way as would automobiles produced

by General Motors in Detroit. In calculating US GNP, however,

Toyota’s profits on US production are subtracted from final out-

put. Conversely, Toyota’s production in the United States does

not factor into Japanese GDP at all, but the profits it earns in the

United States are included in Japanese GNP.

In technical terms, GDP excludes net income payments from

abroad (sometimes called net international factor payments),

while GNP includes them. As a result, “net exports” (EX – IM) is

defined differently for GDP than for GNP.6

Many analysts consider GDP to be a more useful short-term

policy variable, as it appears more closely correlated with employ-

ment, productivity, industrial output, and fixed investment than

GNP. GNP, meanwhile, may be more informative for analyzing

the sources and uses of income. In recent years, many statistical

agencies have begun to use the terminology gross national

income (GNI) rather than GNP.

Page 119: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

108

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

Selected Topics—Background and Mechanics

In some cases, a nation’s GNP may be considerably lower than

its GDP (when substantial factor returns are paid to foreign capi-

tal or nonresident labor). In 2011, countries with especially low

GNP-to-GDP ratios included Luxembourg (GNP was 72 percent

of GDP) and Ireland (82 percent). Both of these countries had

received sizable foreign investments in their economies and thus

paid substantial remittances abroad, reducing GNP. Of course, a

nation’s GNP could also be higher than its GDP (due to returns

from labor and capital abroad). Countries with unusually high

GNP-to-GDP ratios in 2011 included Lesotho (GNP was 121

percent of GDP), Bangladesh (109 percent), and Moldova (108

percent). For most nations, GNP and GDP are fairly similar. In

the United States, which shifted from reporting GNP to reporting

GDP in 1991, the two measures of gross output were nearly

identical.7

Historical and Cross-Country Comparisons

Because GDP is normally calculated on the basis of current prices

expressed in a home currency, adjustments are necessary to facil-

itate historical and cross-country comparisons.

Controlling for Inflation

To begin with, it is necessary to control for changes in the aggre-

gate price level (inflation) in comparing the market value of output

over time. Suppose, for example, that a country’s real output

(e.g., the number of cars produced, the tons of apples harvested)

remained exactly the same from one year to the next but that the

Page 120: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

The Fundamentals of GDP Accounting

109

average price of every product doubled. In this case, nominal GDP

(i.e., the market value of final output) would obviously double as

well, even though the actual amount of output available for con-

sumption—and thus the nation’s standard of living—was left

unchanged. To address this problem, economists developed vari-

ous methods allowing them to control for changes in the price

level and thus to produce estimates of real (inflation-adjusted)

output. The US Commerce Department first began publishing

official estimates of real GNP in 1951.

For a long time, Commerce Department officials relied on a

fixed-price method for constructing real GNP (and later real

GDP). They selected a base year (say, 1950) and then calculated

the value of final goods and services produced in other years

using the prices that existed during the base year. In this way,

real GDP would not rise as a result of inflation, since prices were

held constant. (Simply by dividing nominal GDP by real GDP,

economists could also derive an implicit price deflator, a measure

of the aggregate price level that allowed them to track overall

inflation—or deflation—from year to year.8)

The fixed-price method was not without problems, however.

Arthur Burns, a member of the original team at the Commerce

Department that helped to develop US GDP accounting (and a

future chairman of the Federal Reserve), noted as early as 1930

that a base-year approach failed to account for the introduction

of new goods, the disappearance of old goods, and improve-

ments in the quality of existing goods. A related problem was

that base-year prices eventually produced a distorted measure

of real GDP growth because consumption patterns evolved

over time, as consumers bought ever greater quantities of

goods whose relative prices were falling.9 The further away

from the base year, the more severe this problem (known as the

Page 121: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

110

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

Selected Topics—Background and Mechanics

substitution effect) became. As one observer explained: “Take

1998 as an example: The growth rate of fixed [price] weight

real GDP in this year was 4.5 percent if we use 1995 as the base

year; using 1990 prices it was 6.5 percent; using 1980 prices it

was 18.8 percent; and using 1970 prices, it was a stunning

37.4 percent!”10

The Commerce Department sought to address these problems

by updating the base year frequently and, especially in the

1980s, by introducing a variety of adjustments for changes in

product quality, such as the increasing speed of personal com-

puters.11 By far the biggest reform came in 1996, when

Commerce Department officials adopted a chained method in

place of the traditional fixed-price approach for calculating real

GDP.12 Under the chained method, every year became a base

year, but only for years that were immediately adjacent to it.

Officials could therefore calculate the change in real GDP from

1995 to 1996, from 1996 to 1997, from 1997 to 1998, and so

on, and then link all the individual changes into a seamless

chain. Because the base year was effectively updated annually,

the chained approach did a much better job accounting for

changes in the mix of goods and services sold in the market-

place. One unfortunate by-product, however, was that the com-

ponents of GDP, after being deflated with a chained price index,

no longer necessarily summed exactly to real GDP.

Controlling for Differences in Purchasing Power

Adjustments have also been necessary to facilitate comparisons

of GDP across countries. Since each country’s GDP is first calcu-

lated in that country’s home currency, national estimates must

ultimately be converted to a common currency unit (such as US

dollars) before international comparisons can be made. Market

Page 122: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

The Fundamentals of GDP Accounting

111

exchange rates provide a convenient means of making the con-

version, but they can be misleading, since they reflect only those

goods and services that are actually traded internationally.

Particularly in developing countries, products that are not traded

internationally (from haircuts to health care) may comprise a

large portion of GDP. If, using market exchange rates, the cost of

the same high-quality haircut was $5 in India and $50 in France,

then the use of a market exchange rate to convert GDP into a

common currency unit would underestimate the value of output

in India relative to France.

The standard solution for this problem is to create an index

of purchasing power parity (PPP), essentially calculating the

value of goods and services in each country using the prices of

a common country, such as the United States. Continuing with

the haircut example, the value of high-quality haircuts in India

and France would each be revalued using the price of high-

quality haircuts in the US (say, $40). Since the late 1960s, a

consortium of international agencies, in conjunction with the

University of Pennsylvania, have produced PPP-adjusted esti-

mates of GDP for an increasing number of nations. (See

table 5-2.)13

Investment, Savings, and Foreign Borrowing

GDP accounting is useful because it allows us to calculate the

value of current output and to measure changes in output over

time. Many economists also believe that it provides important

clues about the underlying sources of economic growth and

about the sustainability of growth into the future.

Naturally, investment constitutes a critical link between cur-

rent and future output. GDP accounting not only tells us the

Page 123: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

112

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

Selected Topics—Background and Mechanics

TABLE 5-2

GDP per capita, exchange rate versus purchasing power parity (assorted countries, 2012)

GDP per capita, US$ (market exchange rate)

GDP per capita, PPP (purchasing power parity)

PPP/ER ratio

Argentina $11,560 $18,020 1.6

Brazil $11,570 $12,100 1.0

Burundi $281 $627 2.2

Cambodia $993 $2,530 2.5

Canada $52,152 $42,580 0.8

China $6,290 $9,460 1.5

Egypt $3,020 $6,420 2.1

Ethiopia $434 $1,190 2.7

France $41,060 $36,720 0.9

Germany $41,620 $40,640 1.0

India $1,538 $3,920 2.5

Indonesia $3,540 $4,900 1.4

Iraq $6,190 $5,060 0.8

Ireland $45,920 $42,520 0.9

Israel $30,497 $31,430 1.0

Japan $47,300 $36,230 0.8

Malaysia $10,387 $17,050 1.6

Mexico $10,238 $17,908 1.7

Nigeria $1,640 $1,920 1.2

Norway $99,760 $64,790 0.6

Philippines $2,410 $4,090 1.7

Russia $14,212 $17,610 1.2

Saudi Arabia $25,160 $31,380 1.2

Singapore $51,400 $47,520 0.9

South Africa $7,880 $11,930 1.5

Turkey $10,560 $15,010 1.4

United States $49,959 $49,959 1.0

Source: Economist Intelligence Unit (EIU) Country Data, including EIU estimates.

Page 124: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

The Fundamentals of GDP Accounting

113

value of current investment but also permits us to identify how

this investment is funded. As we have seen,

Gross product = C + I + G + (EX – IM).

Interestingly, gross product also equals gross income,

which—when adjusted to include transfer payments

(Tr)— necessarily equals the sum of consumption (C), private

savings (S), and taxes (T), since all income must ultimately be

used in one of these three ways. As a result, we can say that

Gross product = C + I + G + (EX – IM) = C + S + T – Tr.

Some simple manipulation produces the following identity

regarding the sources of investment:

I = S + (T – G – Tr) + (IM – EX),

where T – G – Tr (the government budget surplus) reflects gov-

ernment savings, and IM – EX (net imports) reflects foreign bor-

rowing, since any excess of imports over exports can only be

funded through borrowing from abroad.

What this tells us is that investment is funded out of these

three basic sources: private savings (personal savings plus the

retained earnings of firms), government savings (the government

budget surplus), and borrowing from abroad (net imports). If a

nation wishes to increase its level of investment, it must either

reduce its private consumption (to increase private savings),

reduce its government spending or raise taxes (to increase

government savings), increase its foreign borrowing, or perhaps

do some combination of all of these. (See table 5-3.)

Page 125: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

114

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

Selected Topics—Background and Mechanics

Although national economic accounting says nothing about

whether any one of these funding methods is better or worse

than the others, some students of economic development have

suggested that foreign borrowing may be more volatile than

domestic savings and may therefore constitute a less reliable

source of investment. When a nation’s foreign borrowing

becomes very large, moreover, critics often warn that the

country is living beyond its means, since foreign borrowing

(i.e., IM – EX > 0) implies that the nation’s domestic expenditure

TABLE 5-3

Investment, savings, and foreign borrowing (United States, 2012)

Billions $ % of GDP

Private investment (I)[ = Private savings + Government savings

+ Net foreign borrowing]

$2,475.2 15.2%

Private saving, gross (Sp ) $,3540.9 21.8%

Personal savingUndistributed corporate profits (with inventory

valuation and capital consumption adjustment)Private consumption of fixed capital (depreciation)

687.4 4.2%

804.3 5.0%

2,049.3 12.6%

Government saving (SG)[ = Government receipts – Government

expenditure = Budget surplus]

–$1,487.7 –9.2%

Total government receipts (taxes), all levels ofgovernmenta (T)

Total government expenditures, all levels of government, including income transfersb (G + Tr)

4,259.2

5,746.9

26.2%

35.4%

Net foreign borrowing (IM – EX)[ = Net imports = Imports – Exports]c

$439 2.7%

Statistical discrepancy –$17 –0.1%

Source: Data drawn from US Bureau of Economic Analysis.

a. Less capital transfer receipts.b. Less capital transfer payments and net purchases of nonproduced assets.c. Less net income receipts, net transfers in, and net capital account inflows.

Page 126: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

The Fundamentals of GDP Accounting

115

(C + I + G) exceeds its domestic output (GDP). This is why

analysts sometimes view economic growth as unsustainable

when a large and persistent current account deficit—and thus

heavy reliance on foreign borrowing—is involved.14

In Mexico in the early 1990s, for example, real GDP was grow-

ing, but the growth was being fueled (at least in part) by increas-

ingly heavy borrowing from abroad. Many country analysts view

a current account deficit of more than 5 percent of GDP as a pos-

sible red flag. In Mexico’s case, the current account deficit had

jumped from 3 percent of GDP in 1990 to 7 percent in 1994.

This shift was also visible on the GDP accounts, with net imports

(IM – EX) having increased from 1.1 to 4.8 percent of GDP over

the same years. Foreign capital, in other words, as well as foreign

goods and services, were pouring into the country.

Some foreign investors and many Mexican officials claimed

that the huge capital inflow reflected a high degree of investor

confidence in Mexico’s economic prospects. Yet total domestic

investment was falling (as a share of GDP), and consumption

was rising. Mexico, it appears, was living beyond its means,

importing foreign goods and services (on the basis of foreign

borrowing) and using the additional output to increase con-

sumption rather than investment. Although experts disagree

about the exact causes, Mexico ultimately suffered a severe cur-

rency crisis in 1994–1995, driving down consumption along

with the peso and erasing nearly all of the apparent gains of the

previous years. A careful review of the nation’s GDP accounts

prior to the collapse might well have given some indication of

the problems ahead.

Page 127: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know
Page 128: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

117

C H A P T E R S I X

Reading a Balance of Payments

Statement

Balance of payments accounting is a close cousin to GDP

accounting in the field of macroeconomics. In fact, both are

essential gear in the macroeconomist’s toolbox. Whereas a GDP

account reports a nation’s output and its component parts, a bal-

ance of payments (BOP) statement provides a record of the coun-

try’s cross-border transactions. As in a GDP account, all of the

figures that appear in a BOP statement are flows, indicating the

value of exports or imports, income receipts or payments, or

new foreign borrowing or lending that have occurred over a par-

ticular period of time—typically a year. This chapter presents a

primer on BOP accounting and the best strategies for reading

and interpreting a BOP statement.

Ch06.indd 117 19/05/14 11:14 PM

Page 129: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Selected Topics

118

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

A Typical Balance of Payments Statement

A BOP statement normally includes at least the following line

items (or some variations thereof):a

Current Account

• Balance on trade in goods and services

– Balance on merchandise trade (goods)

– Balance on trade in services

• Net income (net factor receipts)

• Net unilateral transfers

Capital and Financial Account

• Net capital account

• Financial account

– Net foreign direct investment

– Net portfolio flows

– Other capital flows, net

– Change in official reserves

• Errors and omissions (statistical discrepancy)

a. An alternative approach that the International Monetary Fund (IMF) is adopting and that various nations are planning to adopt as well uses different terms for some categories. However, essential balance-of-payments concepts remain the same. (See “Presenting the Balance of Payments: An Evolving Approach,” at the end of this chapter, for details.)

Ch06.indd 118 19/05/14 11:14 PM

Page 130: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Reading a Balance of Payments Statement

119

Several of these line items require some explanation. Under

the current account, merchandise (or goods) are tangible prod-

ucts, ranging from raw materials to manufactured items. Services

are intangible products, such as shipping, investment banking,

or consulting services. Income receipts and payments include

financial returns (such as interest, dividends, and remitted or

reinvested earnings) on cross-border investments and compen-

sation (including wages and salaries) for cross-border work.

Unilateral transfers (sometimes called “net current transfers”) are

nonreciprocal transactions such as foreign aid or cross-border

charitable assistance (given through the Red Cross, for example).

Regarding the “capital and financial account,” the first thing

that requires explanation here is the heading itself. Until the

1990s, most countries recorded all cross-border financial trans-

actions (i.e., changes in assets and liabilities) under the heading

“capital account.” Beginning in 1993, however, officials at the

International Monetary Fund (IMF) substituted the term “finan-

cial account” for “capital account” and (making matters even

more confusing) assigned a new and far narrower definition to

the term “capital account.” Under this new definition, which is

now widely accepted around the world, the capital account

includes only unilateral transfers of capital, such as the forgive-

ness of one country’s debts by the government of another coun-

try. In most cases, the newly defined capital account is a very

small (almost negligible) item on the balance of payments.

The new “financial account” is far more important, since it

includes all other financial transactions, such as cross-border

trades of stocks and bonds. Although analysts still sometimes

use the term “capital account” with its old, expansive meaning in

mind (in speaking about “capital account liberalization,” for

example), most national governments now use the IMF’s new

Ch06.indd 119 19/05/14 11:14 PM

Page 131: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Selected Topics

120

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

definitions of the capital and financial accounts in preparing

their balance of payments statements.

As for the items listed under the financial account, direct

investment (sometimes referred to as foreign direct investment,

or FDI) involves the cross-border purchase of an equity stake

in a company—a stake large enough (usually greater than

10 percent) to give the new owner managerial influence in the

company. When Daimler-Benz bought Chrysler in 1998, this

represented German FDI in the United States. Portfolio invest-

ment, by contrast, involves cross-border purchases of stocks,

bonds, and other financial instruments (but not in sufficient

concentrations to allow managerial influence). Portfolio invest-

ment is sometimes referred to as “hot money,” since portfolio

investors can often liquidate their holdings and exit a country

at almost a moment’s notice. “Changes in official reserves”

reflect increases or decreases in the government’s stockpile of

monetary gold and foreign currencies (foreign exchange).

Finally, “errors and omissions” is a residual category reflecting

statistical discrepancies in the compilation of BOP data.

Understanding Credits and Debits

In reading a balance of payments statement (such as the one

for the US presented at the end of this chapter), it is important

to recognize that every cross-border transaction involves two

entries, a credit (+) and a debit (−). Among other things, this

means that all of the various positive and negative balances on

a balance of payments (BOP) statement must add up to zero.b

b. The alternative (IMF) approach to the balance of payments, mentioned in the previous footnote and outlined in “Presenting the Balance of Payments: An Evolving Approach” at the end of this chapter, treats the financial account somewhat differently, although its underlying structure remains the same.

Ch06.indd 120 19/05/14 11:14 PM

Page 132: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Reading a Balance of Payments Statement

121

Naturally, knowing the difference between a credit and a debit

is essential. One useful way to think about this is that every

source of funds (e.g., foreign exchange) is a credit, while every

use of funds is a debit.

On the current account, exports of goods and services, income

receipts (such as interest, dividends, or compensation from for-

eigners), and unilateral transfers from abroad are all credits

because they all may be thought of as sources of foreign exchange.

Conversely, imports of goods and services, payments of income

to foreigners, and unilateral transfers given to foreigners are all

debits, since they all may be thought of as uses of foreign

exchange.

On the financial account, the same basic rules apply. Foreign

purchases of domestic financial assets, which constitute a capital

inflow (lending from abroad), are recorded as credits, since they

provide a source of foreign exchange.1 Domestic purchases of

foreign financial assets, which constitute a capital outflow (lend-

ing to foreigners), are recorded as debits because they are a use of

foreign exchange. (See figure 6-1.)

A more precise way to distinguish credits from debits on the

financial account is to think specifically in terms of changes in

assets and liabilities, where assets represent domestic claims

on foreigners and liabilities represent foreign claims on domes-

tic residents and institutions. Thus, a deposit held by a domes-

tic resident in a foreign bank is an asset, whereas a foreign

deposit in a domestic bank is a liability. From an accounting

standpoint, every increase in a liability or decrease in an asset is

recorded as a credit on the financial account, while every increase

in an asset or decrease in a liability is recorded as a debit. When a

foreigner obtains a domestic stock, bond, or bank account

(three forms of capital inflow), this is indicated with a credit

on the financial account, since there has been an increase in a

liability to a foreigner. When a domestic resident obtains

Ch06.indd 121 19/05/14 11:14 PM

Page 133: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Selected Topics

122

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

a foreign stock, bond, or bank account (three forms of capital

outflow), this is indicated with a debit on the financial account,

since there has been an increase in an asset (a claim against a

foreigner).

To see how this works in a specific transaction, imagine that a

US company buys a thousand cell phones from a Chinese com-

pany and pays for them with a check drawn on a US bank.2

foreigners, and unilateral transfers given to foreigners are all deb-

its, since they all may be thought of as uses of foreign exchange.

On the financial account, the same basic rules apply. Foreign

purchases of domestic financial assets, which constitute a capital

inflow (lending from abroad), are recorded as credits, since they

provide a source of foreign exchange. Domestic purchases of for-

eign financial assets, which constitute a capital outflow (lending

to foreigners), are recorded as debits because they are a use of

foreign exchange. (See figure 6-1.)

Reading a Balance of Payments Statement

119

F IGU R E 6 -1

Debits and credits on a balance of payments statement

Debits (–) Credits (+)

Examples:

• Imports

• Income payments (such as interestand dividends paid to foreigners)

• Unilateral transfers to foreigners(such as foreign aid or charitable assistance given to foreigners)

• Capital outflows (such as an increase in domestic deposits in foreign banks or domestic purchases of foreign companies, stocks, or bonds)

• Increase in official reserves(government stocks of gold or foreign exchange)

Rules (regarding BOP debits):

• Uses of foreign exchange

• Increase in an asset (i.e., an increase in a domestic claim on a foreign entity)

• Decrease in a liability (i.e., a decrease in a domestic obligation to foreigners)

Examples:

• Exports

• Income receipts (such as interestand dividends earned on foreign investments)

• Unilateral transfers from abroad(such as foreign aid or charitable assistance received from foreigners)

• Capital inflows (such as an increase in foreign deposits in domestic banks or foreign purchases of domestic companies, stocks, or bonds)

• Decrease in official reserves(government stocks of gold or foreign exchange)

Rules (regarding BOP credits):

• Sources of foreign exchange

• Increase in a liability (i.e., an increase in a domestic obligation to foreigners)

• Decrease in an asset (i.e., a decrease in a domestic claim on a foreign entity)

Moss_06_115to124 4/12/07 1:59 PM Page 119

Ch06.indd 122 19/05/14 11:14 PM

Page 134: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Reading a Balance of Payments Statement

123

In this case, we would see a debit (−) on the US current account,

reflecting the import of cell phones from China; and we would

see a credit (+) on the US financial account, reflecting the pay-

ment that was made to the Chinese company by check against a

US bank. Once the check arrives in China, it represents a claim

on the United States and thus an increase in a domestic (US) liabil-

ity to foreigners. Until the Chinese exercise that claim to purchase

some sort of American output, their willingness to hold the

check (or any other financial instrument into which they could

convert it) constitutes a loan from China to the United States—a

loan that the Chinese can essentially call at their discretion in the

future.

In some cases, one side of a transaction will be misrecorded or

not picked up at all by government officials. The errors-and-

omissions line reflects the net value of all of these discrepancies.

It is calculated simply by adding up all of the other lines on the

balance of payments and reversing the sign, thus ensuring that

all of the lines (including errors and omissions) sum to zero.

Often, the underlying mistakes and discrepancies are innocuous.

In some instances, however, a large debit or credit on the errors-

and-omissions line stems from a large flow of output or capital

that is intentionally being hidden from the authorities, such as

the import or export of illegal drugs or the surreptitious move-

ment of large volumes of US currency across national borders.

When a rich family from a developing country sneaks millions of

dollars of cash into the US packed in a suitcase, this secret

transfer of capital will show up as a debit on errors and omissions

in the developing country’s BOP statement and a credit on errors

and omissions in the US balance of payments. In fact, when a

country suffers a severe financial crisis, one sometimes sees

unusually large negative errors-and-omissions numbers on the

Ch06.indd 123 19/05/14 11:14 PM

Page 135: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Selected Topics

124

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

country’s BOP statement in the months leading up to the crisis,

suggesting that those “in the know” were secretly removing capi-

tal from the country (i.e., engaging in capital flight) before the

collapse.

The Power and Pitfalls of BOP Accounting

Clearly, a country’s balance of payments can be extremely reveal-

ing. One should not be surprised to discover, however, that not

every BOP statement is prepared in exactly the same way. As a

case in point, the organization of the US BOP statement shown

in table 6-1 is a bit different from the generic form presented at

the beginning of this chapter. Specifically, the current account in

the US statement is broken first into “exports” and “imports,”

and the financial account is divided first into “assets” and “liabil-

ities.” In addition, the statistical discrepancy line (errors and

omissions) appears outside the capital and financial account,

rather than within it.

Nevertheless, if you understand the basics of BOP account-

ing, such variations should not present too great a problem as

you seek to make sense of a country’s BOP statement. Indeed,

figuring out a country’s balance of payments is well worth the

effort, as it offers a unique window on the country’s cross-

border transactions and, more broadly, its relationship to the

global economy.

Ch06.indd 124 19/05/14 11:14 PM

Page 136: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Reading a Balance of Payments Statement

125

TABLE 6-1

US balance of payments, 1970–2010 (billions of dollars)

1970 1980 1990 2000 2005 2010

(1) Current account 2.3 2.3 –79.0 –416.3 –739.8 –449.5

(2) Exports

(3) Goods

(4) Services

(5) Imports

(6) Goods

(7) Services

(8) Income receipts

(9) Income payments

(10) Unilateral transfers, net

56.6

42.5

14.2

−54.4

−39.9

−14.5

11.7

−5.5

−6.2

271.8

224.3

47.6

−291.2

−249.8

−41.5

72.6

−42.5

−8.3

535.2

387.4

147.8

−616.1

−498.4

−117.7

171.7

−143.2

−26.7

1,072.8

784.8

288.0

−1,450.1

−1,231.7

−218.4

352.5

−333.3

−58.2

1,288.3

911.7

376.6

−1,996.2

−1,695.8

−300.4

537.3

−469.7

−99.5

1,844.5

1,288.8

555.7

−2,343.8

−1,939.0

−404.9

678.1

−500.4

−127.8

(11) Capital and financial account

−2.1 −24.9 50.9 477.7 713.8 437.9

(12) Capital account, net 0.0 0.0 -7.2 0.0 13.1 −0.2

(13) Assets, net (exclud-ing financial deriva-tives)

−9.3 −87.0 −81.2 −560.5 −546.6 −910.0

(14) US official reserve assets, net

(15) US government (nonreserve) assets, net

(16) US private assets, net

Of which:(17) direct investment(18) foreign securities

2.5

−1.6

−10.2

−7.6−1.1

−8.2

−5.2

−73.7

−19.2−3.6

−2.2

2.3

−81.4

−37.2−28.8

−0.3

−0.9

−559.3

−159.2−127.9

14.1

5.5

−566.3

−36.2−251.2

−1.8

7.5

−915.7

−301.1−139.1

(19) Liabilities, net (excluding financial derivatives)

7.2 62.0 139.4 1,038.2 1,247.3 1,333.9

(20) To foreign official agencies

(21) US government securities

(22) Other liabilities, net Of which:(23) direct investment(24) US Treasury securities(25) other securities

7.8

9.4

−0.6

1.50.1

2.2

16.6

11.9

45.4

16.92.6

5.5

33.9

30.2

105.4

48.5−2.5

1.6

42.8

35.7

995.5

321.3−70.0

459.9

259.3

213.3

988.1

112.6132.3

450.4

398.3

353.3

935.6

205.9298.3

140.9

(continued )

Ch06.indd 125 19/05/14 11:14 PM

Page 137: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Selected Topics

126

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

Presenting the Balance of Payments: An Evolving Approach

Different organizations sometimes use different methods in

producing balance of payments statements. The

International Monetary Fund’s presentation of the US balance of

payments, for example, differs from that of the US Bureau of

Economic Analysis (BEA). Fortunately, once one understands

basic balance of payments concepts, it is relatively easy to make

sense of alternative approaches.

At the time of this writing, the IMF has begun to implement a

new presentation of the balance of payments, detailed in the sixth

1970 1980 1990 2000 2005 2010

(26) Financial derivatives, net

n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a 14.1

(27) Statistical discrepancy

−0.2 22.6 28.1 -61.4 26.0 11.6

Source: Adapted from the Bureau of Economic Analysis.Note that on a BOP statement, the terms “assets” and “liabilities” always refer to changes in assets and changes in liabilities in the year or quarter indicated, not to total assets or total liabilities held as of that year or quarter. On the US BOP statement shown in table 6-1, for example, American holdings of foreign assets increased by $910.0 billion in the year 2010 (recall that an increase in an asset is recorded as a debit in this accounting system), and American obligations to foreigners increased by $1,333.9 billion (recall that an increase in a liability is recorded as a credit). Although total American holdings of foreign assets and total foreign holdings of American assets are naturally much larger, they are not recorded on the BOP statement.

TABLE 6-1 (continued)

US balance of payments, 1970–2010 (billions of dollars)

Ch06.indd 126 19/05/14 11:14 PM

Page 138: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Reading a Balance of Payments Statement

127

edition of its Balance of Payments Manual (BPM6). The US BEA

and many other national agencies will be adopting variations on

this approach over the coming years. (See table 6-2 for a proto-

type of the way the BEA expects to implement BPM6.) The new

approach is designed to better reflect real-world transactions, and

some people may find that they grasp it more intuitively than the

earlier approach.

The data in headline categories—the net current account, capi-

tal account, financial account, and errors and omissions—will not

change in BPM6.a Current-account categories also remain famil-

iar, such as exports and imports of goods and services. However,

the new system presents both exports and imports as positive

numbers. Thus, the balance of trade equals exports minus

imports, rather than exports plus imports. In addition, some labels

are changing: “income” will be called “primary income,” and

“transfers” will be called “secondary income.”

Throughout the new balance of payments, some types of

transactions are being reclassified. As an example, suppose a US

firm buys smartphones from a Chinese manufacturer and then

sells them to French consumers. Formerly, the US firm was con-

sidered to be performing a manufacturing service. The value

added (profits minus expenses) was included under service

exports. In the new system, the United States is considered to

have imported the cell phones and then reexported them to

France. The transaction is thus recorded under goods (both as an

import and an export), rather than under services.

a. The 2010 headline data in the prototype table 6-2 vary from those in table 6-1 only because the BEA constructed its prototype table using preliminary data released in June 2011, while table 6-1 was created with better data, revised in June 2013.

Ch06.indd 127 19/05/14 11:14 PM

Page 139: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Selected Topics

128

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

TABLE 6-2

Prototype of planned presentation of the US balance of payments under the new method, 2006–2010 (billions of dollars)

2006 2007 2008 2009 2010

Current account balance

−800.6 −710.3 −677.1 −376.5 −470.9

Goods balance

−832.9 −814.6 −825 −502.5 −642.2

Exports 1,042.2 1,168.2 1,312.7 1,072.9 1,292.4

Imports 1,875.1 1,982.8 2,137.6 1,575.4 1,934.6

Services balance

79.6 118 126.6 121.3 142.2

Exports 418.5 488.2 532.5 504.8 546.8

Imports 338.9 370.2 405.9 383.6 404.7

Primary income balance

44.2 101.5 147.1 128 165.2

Receipts 693 843.9 823.5 607.2 670.7

Payments 648.9 742.4 676.4 479.2 505.5

Secondary income (transfers) balance

−91.5 −115.1 −125.9 −123.3 −136.1

Receipts 67.9 70.3 83.5 84.7 83.7

Payments 159.5 185.4 209.3 208 219.8

Capital account balance, net

−1.8 0.4 6 −0.1 −0.2

Financial account, net

−809.1 −617.3 −730.6 −245.9 −254.2

Financial derivatives, net

−29.7 −6.2 32.9 −49.5 −13.7

Direct investment, net

1.8 192.9 19 145 115.1

Assets 296.1 532.9 351.7 303.6 393.7

Liabilities 294.3 340.1 332.7 158.6 278.6

(continued )

Ch06.indd 128 19/05/14 11:14 PM

Page 140: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Reading a Balance of Payments Statement

129

2006 2007 2008 2009 2010

Portfolio investment, net

−633 −776.9 −809.4 9.9 −520.8

Assets 493.7 379.7 -285.7 369.8 186.1

Liabilities 1,126.7 1,156.6 523.7 359.9 706.9

Other investment, net

−145.8 −27.1 22 −403.6 163.3

Assets 549.5 659.8 −380.3 −586.3 465.9

Liabilities 695.3 686.9 −402.4 −182.7 302.6

Reserve assets

−2.4 0.1 4.8 52.3 1.8

Net errors and omissions

−6.7 92.7 −59.5 130.8 216.8

Source: Adapted from Bureau of Economic Analysis, “Table A. U.S. International Transactions (Prototype),” http://www.bea.gov/international/modern.htm. Based on data released in June 2011.

By far the most important changes in the BPM6 approach

involve the financial account. Under the new system, net invest-

ment in any category, such as direct or portfolio investment,

equals the accumulation of assets minus the buildup (or “incur-

rence”) of liabilities. Both an increase in an asset and an increase

in a liability are recorded as positive numbers, and both a

decrease in an asset and a decrease in a liability are recorded as

negative numbers. For example, if an American buys a Mexican

bond or stock with a check on an American bank, the new system

records the increase in US assets (the foreign stock or bond) as a

positive number, whereas under the earlier system, it would have

been recorded as a negative number. The new system also

records the increased liability in this transaction (the check written

to a foreigner) as a positive number, but ultimately subtracts the

change in liabilities from the change in assets in determining

Ch06.indd 129 19/05/14 11:14 PM

Page 141: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Selected Topics

130

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

each category or balance in the financial account (i.e., direct

investment, portfolio investment, and other investment) as well

as the balance on the financial account itself. Bottom line: net

lending abroad is recorded in the new system as a positive

balance on the financial account, and net borrowing as a

negative balance—just the opposite of the traditional system.

As a consequence of the new approach, it will no longer be

true that the main BOP accounts (current account, capital account,

financial account, and errors and omissions) will sum to zero.

Instead, under the new system, the current account plus the capi-

tal account plus errors and omissions minus the financial account

will equal zero.

To see how all of this plays out in practice, consider one more

transaction: a US firm exports a machine tool to an Italian firm,

which pays for the machine tool with a check on an Italian bank.

The transaction will be recorded as an increase in US goods

exports, a positive number on the current account, as well as an

increase in US assets (the check from a foreigner), a positive

number on the financial account. The increase in exports minus

the increase in financial assets will equal zero.

Fortunately, this rather significant change in the way financial

transactions are accounted for under the emerging IMF system is

relatively easy to understand once one knows the new rules.

Ch06.indd 130 19/05/14 11:14 PM

Page 142: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

131

C H A P T E R S E V E N

Understanding Exchange Rates

For anyone engaged in cross-border transactions, grappling with

exchange rates is a necessary fact of life. Although no one can

predict with great confidence how a currency will move over a

given time period—whether it will appreciate or depreciate, let

alone by how much—we can identify key factors that are likely

to influence exchange-rate movements, over both the short term

and the long term. This chapter offers a brief overview of the

most important factors, why they matter, and how they interact.

The Current Account Balance

A country’s trade balance—or, more precisely, its current account

balance—is one factor that can influence exchange rates. If, for

example, a country’s consumers developed an enormous appetite

Ch07.indd 131 19/05/14 11:23 PM

Page 143: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

132

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

Selected Topics—Background and Mechanics

for foreign products, the country’s current account balance

would presumably deteriorate and its currency depreciate.

Depreciation would occur as increased domestic demand for for-

eign products bid up the price of the foreign currencies needed

to buy them.

As it turns out, however, buoyant demand for goods and ser-

vices, whether foreign or domestic, is not the only possible

driver of a current account deficit. If, for example, foreigners

developed an enormous appetite for a country’s financial assets,

the country’s current account balance would deteriorate (the

flip side of its improving financial account balance), but its cur-

rency would most likely appreciate. Appreciation would occur

as a result of increased foreign demand for the country’s domes-

tic financial assets (and for the currency in which they are

denominated). In this case, a current account deficit would be

associated with appreciation, rather than depreciation, of the

currency.

In principle, the key question is not whether a country’s cur-

rent account is in surplus or deficit, but rather what factors are

driving the surplus or deficit—namely, demand for goods and

services or demand for capital. Increased foreign demand for a

country’s goods and services will likely bolster both the country’s

current account balance and its currency, whereas increased for-

eign demand for a country’s financial assets will likely cause the

country’s currency to appreciate even as its current account

deteriorates.

Precisely because it is difficult to disentangle these factors in

practice, experts frequently disagree on how a particular

country’s current account surplus or deficit is likely to influence

its exchange rate. In general, though, sustained current account

deficits appear to be more typically associated with long-term currency

Ch07.indd 132 19/05/14 11:23 PM

Page 144: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Understanding Exchange Rates

133

depreciation than with long-term appreciation (and the opposite is

generally true of sustained current account surpluses).

Inflation and Purchasing Power Parity

A closely related factor that has the potential to affect exchange

rates is inflation. In general, when one country experiences a

consistently higher inflation rate than another, economists

expect that the first country’s currency will depreciate relative to

that of the other country.

One way to understand this is to focus on the trade (or cur-

rent account) balance—and especially on the domestic demand

for foreign products. Rising prices (i.e., inflation) in Country X

will make imports from Country Y increasingly attractive to

Country X’s consumers, assuming Country Y’s prices haven’t

increased as fast. As a result, Country X will see its trade balance

with Country Y deteriorate and its currency depreciate

(as domestic demand for Country Y’s products, and thus for

Country Y’s currency, grows).

Economists generally view this relationship between inflation

and exchange rates through a purchasing power parity model of

exchange rate determination. The basic idea, drawn from the

so-called Law of One Price, is that a unit of currency (say, a

dollar) should always have the same purchasing power in one

country as in another, excluding transportation costs and taxes.

Yet inflation threatens to undermine this parity. If, for example,

prices rose faster in the United States than in Britain, Americans

would discover that a dollar purchased more in Britain than in

the US (since US prices were now higher as a result of US

inflation). For purchasing power parity to be restored, the dollar

Ch07.indd 133 19/05/14 11:23 PM

Page 145: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

134

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

Selected Topics—Background and Mechanics

would have to depreciate relative to the pound, until a dollar

could once again purchase the same quantity of (identical)

goods and services in the United States as it could in Britain.

That is, the country with higher inflation will tend to see its

currency depreciate.

Interest Rates

Interest rates are yet another important factor that can influence

the behavior of exchange rates. In fact, many financial experts

and currency traders regard interest rates as the single most

powerful driver of exchange rates, particularly over short time

horizons.

At a practical level, a country’s currency will tend to appreci-

ate when its interest rate rises relative to that of other countries

(and to depreciate when its interest rate falls). The essential logic

here is that a rising interest rate within a country makes foreign-

ers more eager to invest there, attracted by the prospect of a

higher return on their invested funds. The resulting capital

inflows drive up the value of the country’s currency, as foreigners

compete to invest in the country’s financial markets.

However, one of the most important exchange-rate models

economists have developed seems to predict a very different

result. According to the uncovered interest rate parity model, if

Country A’s interest rate rises above Country B’s (with no addi-

tional investment risk), then we should expect Country A’s cur-

rency to undergo an immediate appreciation but then to

depreciate in value after that. The basic reasoning behind this

model stems once again from the Law of One Price. For a given

level of risk, a dollar (or a euro or a yen) should be expected to

Ch07.indd 134 19/05/14 11:23 PM

Page 146: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Understanding Exchange Rates

135

earn the same average return regardless of where it is invested.

Thus, if a higher interest rate is being paid in one country than

another, then investors should expect the country’s currency

ultimately to depreciate—and to depreciate by just enough to

wipe out any excess returns that would have accrued from

investing there.

Although this interest rate parity model is conceptually bul-

letproof, it doesn’t always hold up well in practice. Most studies

suggest that, if anything, a country’s currency tends to appreciate

after a rise in its interest rate and to depreciate after a fall, not the

other way around.

Making Sense of Exchange Rates

So what is one to make of all this? Perhaps the most important les-

son of all is simply that currency markets are unpredictable—and

that this remains true no matter how much training in economics

one has. (See “The US Dollar: Defying the Experts.”) As a column

in the Financial Times once observed, “Explaining FX market

moves coherently has always been difficult . . . Ask 10 traders, and

you will be likely to get 10 different explanations . . .”1

Nevertheless, although exchange rates are often volatile and

never perfectly predictable, it is still reasonable to conclude that

they are subject to the basic pressures of supply and demand in

the marketplace. Since an exchange rate is simply the price of

one currency in terms of another, anything that raises the

demand for a currency (or reduces the demand for other curren-

cies) will create pressure for appreciation. Anything that reduces

demand for the currency (or increases demand for other curren-

cies) will create pressure for depreciation.

Ch07.indd 135 19/05/14 11:23 PM

Page 147: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

136

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

Selected Topics—Background and Mechanics

A sudden surge in American demand for foreign goods or

financial assets, for example, will tend to weaken the dollar (and

simultaneously strengthen other currencies). A burst of European

inflation would tend to weaken the euro and strengthen the

dollar at the same time. An unexpected increase in British

The US Dollar: Defying the Experts

In 2005 and 2006, the US dollar defied the predictions of many

of the best in the business, including billionaire investor Warren

Buffett and former Treasury secretary Robert Rubin. Both believed

that America’s massive current account deficits (5.1 percent of

GDP in 2004 and 5.6 percent of GDP in 2005) would eventually

drive the dollar to depreciate. Although both may prove right over

the long term—Rubin said he thought his prediction “was right,

probabilistically”—both lost large sums in the short run, when the

dollar refused to collapse on cue. Buffett is said to have lost nearly

$1 billion for Berkshire Hathaway and Rubin more than $1 million

of his own money.a

The point is that no one—not even the world’s most respected

authorities—can know for sure how a currency will move in the

future. Making predictions based on fundamentals, including the

factors reviewed in this chapter, should increase the odds of get-

ting it right, but certainly cannot guarantee the success of any

particular prediction. As Robert Rubin suggested, when it comes

to exchange rate forecasts, the very best one can do is to try to be

“right, probabilistically.”

David Leonhardt, “A Gamble Bound to Win, Eventually,” New York Times, November 1, 2006.

Ch07.indd 136 19/05/14 11:23 PM

a.

Page 148: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Understanding Exchange Rates

137

interest rates, meanwhile, would likely strengthen the pound,

particularly in the short term, though it is possible that the Law

of One Price would require a subsequent depreciation of the

pound over the long term.

In fact, the reason why exchange rate movements are so diffi-

cult to predict in practice is that currencies are subject to a myr-

iad of pressures at the same time—ups and downs in aggregate

demand, currency interventions by governments, interest rate

movements, inflation here, deflation there, financial panics,

political crises, oil shocks, new technologies, abrupt changes in

expectations, and on and on. In general, though, the best predic-

tors are probably:

• Interest rates for short-term movements (with interest-rate

increases and decreases associated with rapid appreciation

and depreciation, respectively);

• Inflation for medium-term movements (with relatively high

inflation associated with depreciation and relatively low

inflation with appreciation); and

• Current account imbalances for longer-term movements

(with deficits associated with depreciation and surpluses

with appreciation, over extended periods of time).

Although there are no perfect predictors, these simple rela-

tionships at least represent reasonable rules of thumb for the

business manager (or foreign investor or traveler) trying to make

sense of exchange rates in an increasingly complex and dynamic

global economy.

Ch07.indd 137 19/05/14 11:23 PM

Page 149: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Ch07.indd 138 19/05/14 11:23 PM

Page 150: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

139

C o n C l u s i o n

Putting the Pieces Together

We have clearly covered a lot of ground over the previous chap-

ters. To help keep things in perspective, it is worth returning to

the three core concepts of macroeconomics presented in part I:

output, money, and expectations. All three—as well as some of

the key relationships between them—are represented graphi-

cally in figure C-1.

output

Output, which comprises the goods and services produced in an

economy, lies at the heart of macroeconomics. The amount of

output a country produces (or, more precisely, its amount of out-

put per capita) determines its level of prosperity. A standard

Conclusion.indd 139 19/05/14 11:29 PM

Page 151: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Conclusion

140

measure of national output is gross domestic product, or GDP.

Nominal GDP measures the total value—at current market

prices—of all final goods and services produced in a country in a

given year. Although a country may temporarily consume more

than it produces, it can do so only by importing more goods and

services than it exports and by borrowing from foreigners to

finance the difference. All of these cross-border transactions are

accounted for in a country’s balance of payments (BOP).

Money

Money is critical for facilitating the exchange of goods and ser-

vices within an economy. It can also influence many other impor-

tant economic variables, including interest rates, exchange rates,

and the aggregate price level (inflation). In general, an increase

in the money supply is expected to drive down interest rates,

measure of national output is gross domestic product, or GDP.

Nominal GDP measures the total value—at current market

prices—of all final goods and services produced in a country in

a given year. Although a country may temporarily consume more

than it produces, it can do so only by importing more goods and

services than it exports and by borrowing from foreigners to

finance the difference. All of these cross-border transactions are

accounted for in a country’s balance of payments (BOP).

Money

Money is critical for facilitating the exchange of goods and ser-

vices within an economy. It can also influence many other im-

portant economic variables, including interest rates, exchange

Conclusion

134

F I G U R E C - 1

The macro “M”

Nominalversus

real

Money Expectations

Actualversus

potential

OutputGDPBOP

InflationInterest rates

Exchange rates

“Animal spirits”“Irrationalexuberance”Inflationaryexpectations

Monetary and fiscal policy

Moss_08Con_133to142 4/12/07 2:01 PM Page 134

Figure C-1

Conclusion.indd 140 19/05/14 11:29 PM

Page 152: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Conclusion

141

cause the exchange rate to depreciate, and increase the aggregate

price level.

When the price level rises, nominal values will rise with it,

but real ones will not. Nominal values (such as nominal GDP

or nominal wages) are measured in terms of current market

prices, whereas real values (such as real GDP or real wages) are

measured in terms of constant prices and thus reflect underly-

ing quantities, after controlling for inflation. A 5 percent

increase in real GDP, for example, means that output—the vari-

able that macroeconomists most care about—has increased by

5 percent, regardless of the inflation rate. Although inflation

itself is determined by many factors, money may well be the

most important one.

In fact, precisely because money is such a pivotal factor in the

economy, governments worldwide assume responsibility for

managing the money supply and typically delegate this responsi-

bility to independent central banks. Although they cannot com-

pletely control the money supply (since a large part of it is

created by private commercial banks in the form of checking

accounts), central banks can exert a great deal of influence over

the money supply—by determining how much currency to

issue, for example. A central bank’s primary tools for influencing

the money supply are the discount rate, the reserve requirement,

and open market operations. In the United States, almost all

monetary policy is now conducted through open market opera-

tions, which involve the buying and selling of government bonds

on the secondary market. Through these open market operations

(which expand or contract the money supply), central banks can

effectively set the short-term interest rate, which has long been

regarded as the primary instrument of modern monetary policy.

In recent years, following the financial crisis of 2007–2009, the

Conclusion.indd 141 19/05/14 11:29 PM

Page 153: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Conclusion

142

Federal Reserve also sought to influence longer-term interest

rates by purchasing a range of longer-term instruments (such as

mortgage-backed securities) through a policy known as “quanti-

tative easing.” This nontraditional policy remained controversial,

however, with little agreement—even among monetary

experts—about whether it would ultimately be seen as a success

or a failure.

Central bankers typically have many goals in conducting

monetary policy. They wish to maintain economic growth at the

highest sustainable level; they hope to keep unemployment to an

absolute minimum; they aim to keep exchange rates stable; they

hope to maintain interest rates at reasonable levels (so as not to

discourage investment); and they seek to keep inflation low.

Although central bankers would, ideally, like to achieve all of

these goals simultaneously, there is now a broad consensus that a

primary objective must be to stabilize the price level. One strat-

egy for achieving this goal is inflation targeting, which requires

that central bankers raise interest rates (by slowing money

growth) when inflation begins to rise above a target level—such

as 2 percent—and that they lower interest rates (by accelerating

money growth) when inflation threatens to fall below that target.

Although inflation targeting remains a preferred strategy in

most monetary circles, the financial crisis of 2007–2009

reminded many observers that financial stability also must be a

paramount goal. Indeed, when the two objectives—price stabil-

ity and financial stability—briefly appeared to come into conflict

during the crisis, the Federal Reserve made clear that financial

stability took precedence. In addition, weak job growth since the

crisis led the Fed in late 2012 to explicitly list lower unemploy-

ment (specifically, an upper-bound target of 6.5 percent) as a

policy goal, though—importantly—it also made clear that this

Conclusion.indd 142 19/05/14 11:29 PM

Page 154: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Conclusion

143

commitment was contingent on inflation remaining at or near its

2 percent target.

Expectations

Finally, in all aspects of macroeconomics, expectations constitute

a powerful force for both good and ill. As we have seen, expecta-

tions can literally drive reality—particularly in the short run. If

individuals and firms expect inflation, they may actually create it

by preemptively demanding wage and price increases. If cur-

rency traders sell dollars en masse on the expectation that the

dollar is about to depreciate, their selling—in most cases—will

cause it to depreciate immediately. The same is true of interest

rates. If bond traders expect the interest rate to rise, they will

drive the long-term interest rate upward as they sell bonds in an

effort to limit their own capital loss.

Negative expectations can prove particularly brutal when they

relate to the economy as a whole. If business managers as a group

suddenly become pessimistic about future demand, their gloomy

expectation can become self-fulfilling. They might prepare for

“bad times” by canceling investment projects and laying off

workers, thus causing a reduction in aggregate demand. At this

point, the Keynesian income multiplier works in reverse, as con-

sumers and business managers respond to the drop in demand

by cutting back further on consumption and investment, poten-

tially setting off a disastrous downward spiral. When this occurs,

actual GDP falls below potential GDP because many productive

resources (including both people and equipment) are thrown

out of work. Real GDP falls, unemployment rises, and prices

tend to decline. (Conversely, if people become overly optimistic

Conclusion.indd 143 19/05/14 11:29 PM

Page 155: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Conclusion

144

about their economic fortunes, they may drive demand far

beyond the true productive capacity of the economy. If this

occurs, actual GDP will rise above potential, the economy will

“overheat,” and inflation will increase—all because of irrationally

exuberant expectations.)1

Basic Concepts, Broad Applications: From Dairy Farmers to Debtor Nations

As the reader has no doubt noticed, many of the illustrations

provided in this book—such as the one in chapter 2 in which

Farmer Bill lends 10 cows to Farmer Tom—are contrived. But since

they are rooted in truly fundamental economic problems and

issues, they should nonetheless prove useful to you as you work

to understand real-world economic phenomena.

In our dairy farmer example, Bill lent Tom 10 cows at the

beginning of the year, and Tom promised to repay the loan in

money with10 percent interest. Since the original price of cows

was $1,000 a head, Tom agreed to repay $11,000 at the end of

the year (to cover the original 10 cows plus one more, as inter-

est). The problem arose when the price of cows increased by

10 percent, meaning that Bill would only be able to purchase 10

cows—not 11—with the ultimate repayment of $11,000. Although

this example was useful in illustrating the distinction between real

and nominal interest rates, one might regard it as terribly unrealis-

tic. After all, aren’t loans always paid and repaid in money? When’s

the last time you heard of a loan that was made in goods but was

to be repaid in dollars?

As it turns out, this illustration is not nearly as unrealistic as it

may seem. In fact, the entire US trade deficit rests on precisely

Conclusion.indd 144 19/05/14 11:29 PM

Page 156: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Conclusion

145

this type of loan. Consider the US trade deficit with China, for

example. Each year, China exports more output (such as elec-

tronics and clothing) to America than it receives in return from

America. The difference, which is composed of real goods and

services (real output), is actually being lent to the United States.

In exchange, the Chinese receive US financial assets, which are

promises to repay—in dollars—in the future. Just like the original

dairy farmer in our illustration, therefore, the Chinese are lending

real output in exchange for a promised repayment in dollars.

Ideally, since the financial assets the Chinese receive generate at

least some interest and dividends (again, in dollars), the recouped

dollars should provide the Chinese with command over more

real output in the future, just as the original dairy farmer expected

to use the $11,000 repayment of his loan to buy 11 new cows

(one more than the original 10 he lent). One problem for the

Chinese is that if US prices rise in the meantime (that is, if the US

suffers inflation), then the Chinese will end up with less com-

mand over American goods and services than they expected (just

as, after the price of cows had increased, the first dairy farmer

was surprised that he could only buy 10, rather than 11, cows

with the proceeds of his loan).a Clearly, the dangers of price infla-

tion are not limited to dairy farmers. They are of profound practi-

cal significance to all creditors and debtors, including creditor

nations and debtor nations all around the world.

Although this is just one example, there are countless others

like it. If treated with care, the essential principles of macroeco-

nomics can provide profound insight into economic and business

matters, both national and global.

a. Similarly, a depreciation of the US dollar relative to the yuan would leave the Chinese creditors with less command over Chinese goods and services than they had expected when they originally made the loans.

Conclusion.indd 145 19/05/14 11:29 PM

Page 157: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Conclusion

146

In a sense, one of the main jobs of macroeconomic policy

makers is to manage expectations. During the Great Depression,

when real GDP had fallen sharply and unemployment had

reached dizzying heights, the British economist John Maynard

Keynes recommended aggressive deficit spending (expansion-

ary fiscal policy) to help turn things around. In his view, large

deficits would create new demand for goods and services and,

as a result, would lead people to revise their expectations

upward. As consumers and business managers became more

confident, they would increase their own expenditures, setting

off a virtuous spiral upward, and the economy would come

roaring back to life. (In principle, government policy makers

could also cool expectations during periods of overheating by

running budget surpluses, and thus reducing demand, though

in practice the strategic use of budget surpluses has proved rel-

atively rare.)

Expectations are central not only to fiscal policy, but to

monetary policy as well. By credibly committing to fight infla-

tion relentlessly whenever it appears, central banks can help

kill off inflationary expectations, thus making it far less likely

that their anti-inflation weapons will ever have to be used.

Naturally, the same basic idea also applies to controlling defla-

tion. If central bankers make clear that they will respond

aggressively to even a small drop in the price level, people are

unlikely to expect deflation and, as a result, deflation is less

likely to occur.

uses and Misuses of Macroeconomics

There can be little doubt that macroeconomists have a great deal

to teach us about the world. At the same time, it is essential to

Conclusion.indd 146 19/05/14 11:29 PM

Page 158: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Conclusion

147

keep in mind that macroeconomics is a very inexact science. Just

as it is dangerous to become overconfident about one’s economic

prospects or about the prospects of the economy as a whole, it is

also dangerous to become overconfident about one’s understand-

ing of how the macro economy works. Economic relationships

that seem perfectly compelling in theory do not always hold in

practice. To give just two examples: interest rates do not always

fall when money supply rises, and stagnant economies don’t

always improve in response to deficit spending.

If this is the case, then why study macroeconomics? The

answer, in short, is that macroeconomic theory provides us with

a baseline against which to compare and assess reality and, more

broadly, with a framework for understanding economic events.

When standard macroeconomic relationships break down in

practice (such as when interest rates rise despite increased

money growth), a good understanding of macroeconomics

should help us to ask the right questions and potentially identify

what factor or factors might be causing such a departure from

the rule.

Unfortunately, some students of macroeconomics are so confi-

dent about what they have learned that they refuse to see depar-

tures at all, preferring to believe that the economic relationships

defined in their textbooks are inviolable rules. This sort of arro-

gance (or narrow-mindedness) becomes a true hazard to society

when it infects macroeconomic policy making. The policy maker

who believes he or she knows exactly how the economy will

respond to a particular stimulus is a very dangerous policy maker

indeed.

The good news is that when interpreted judiciously, the basic

principles of macroeconomics—which draw connections

between output, money, and expectations—can prove enor-

mously illuminating. Admittedly, we could only scratch the sur-

Conclusion.indd 147 19/05/14 11:29 PM

Page 159: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Conclusion

148

face of macroeconomic knowledge in this short book. But if you

keep your eyes open, you may notice that the basic principles

and relationships we have explored here help to shed light on a

surprisingly broad range of phenomena, many of which shape

the business environment and—more concretely—affect the rel-

ative risks and rewards of decisions that all of us (including busi-

ness managers) make every day.

Conclusion.indd 148 19/05/14 11:29 PM

Page 160: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

149

E p i l o g u E

The financial crisis of 2007–2009 caught nearly everyone by

surprise, including the vast majority of economists. In fact, in the

years leading up to the calamity, many economists used the

phrase “The Great Moderation” to characterize the previous two

decades, seeing the period as one of exceptional macroeconomic

stability. Although Ben Bernanke did not invent the term, he

made it famous in a widely celebrated speech in 2004, two years

before he became chairman of the Federal Reserve. Highlighting

a “substantial decline in macroeconomic volatility” since the

mid-1980s, Bernanke suggested that monetary economists and

central bankers deserved a good deal of the credit for taming the

business cycle. As he put it, “improvements in monetary policy,

though certainly not the only factor, have probably been an

important source of the Great Moderation.”1 The idea that a

financial and economic crisis of extraordinary proportions was

just around the corner seemed almost unimaginable, except

perhaps to a relatively small number of dissident thinkers who

saw the associated run-up in asset prices as an unsustainable

bubble.2

In retrospect, the moniker “Great Moderation” reveals a cer-

tain myopia. To be sure, GDP growth was less volatile than in

earlier periods, and inflation remained subdued. But many other

economic trends that preceded the crisis—including exception-

ally low interest rates, a steep rise in housing prices, the prolif-

eration of subprime mortgages, and large increases in leverage

(debt) all across the financial system—were anything but

Page 161: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Epilogue

150

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

moderate and, ultimately, laid the basis for collapse. Indeed, it is

difficult to dismiss altogether those who see the financial crisis of

2007–2009 as a challenge to modern economics or, at least, as

evidence of its limits.3

Yet, at the same time, the response to the crisis—particularly

in the United States—reflected dramatic progress relative to the

early 1930s, when poor macroeconomic policy almost certainly

compounded the nation’s mounting economic troubles and may

well have ensured a deep depression. American policy makers in

the early thirties largely pursued tight fiscal and monetary poli-

cies, with lawmakers from both major political parties endorsing

balanced budgets as a weapon against the economic downturn

and officials at the Federal Reserve championing a policy of “liq-

uidationism” for ailing banks and strict adherence to the gold

standard, even to the point of sharply raising interest rates in

October 1931 to stem gold outflows.

By contrast, in responding to the mounting crisis of 2007–

2009, key US policy makers from both parties implemented

expansionary fiscal policies, including tax cuts and spending

increases, and officials at the Federal Reserve dramatically eased

monetary policy, lending aggressively to troubled financial insti-

tutions and going to unprecedented lengths to drive down inter-

est rates (see table E-1). Despite ongoing debates among

macroeconomists, the fact that the financial crisis of 2007–2009

never turned into a Second Great Depression suggests that

American policy makers may have learned something important

since the 1930s about how to manage economic policy in the

face of a major financial crisis.

Bernanke, no doubt, will remain a controversial figure for

many years to come. His decisions as Federal Reserve chairman

to help rescue key financial institutions, to push the federal

funds rate essentially to zero, and to engage in nontraditional

Page 162: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Fed

eral

sur

plu

s (+

) or

def

icit

(-),

on-

bud

get

(%

GD

P)a

Fed

eral

fu

nds

rate

(%

)a

Tota

l ass

ets

of

the

Fed

eral

R

eser

ve

($ b

illio

ns)a

Tota

l dep

osi

ts o

f fa

iled

or

assi

sted

b

anks

($ b

illio

ns)b

Rea

l GD

P

gro

wth

(a

nnua

l %

chan

ge)

b

Une

mp

loym

ent

rate

(%)a

Infla

tio

n ra

te (%

ch

ang

e C

PI)b

S&

P50

0 In

dex

a

2006

−3.

25.

1787

10

2.7

4.4

3.2

1,41

8.30

2007

−2.

43.

0689

12

1.8

5.0

2.8

1,46

8.36

2008

−4.

40.

142,

240

515

−0.

37.

33.

890

3.25

2009

−10

.80.

052,

234

1,22

7−

2.8

9.9

−0.

41,

115.

10

2010

−9.

30.

132,

421

802.

59.

41.

61,

257.

64

2011

−8.

90.

042,

926

311.

88.

53.

21,

257.

60

2012

−7.

10.

092,

926

112.

87.

92.

11,

426.

19

2013

−4.

30.

074,

033

51.

96.

71.

51,

848.

36

Sou

rces

: Fed

eral

def

icit:

His

toric

al B

udge

t Dat

a, F

ebru

ary

2014

, Con

gres

sion

al B

udge

t Offi

ce, h

ttp

://w

ww

.cb

o.go

v/p

ublic

atio

n/45

067;

fed

eral

fund

s ra

te: “

Sel

ecte

d In

tere

st

Rat

es (D

aily

),” F

eder

al R

eser

ve S

tatis

tics

Rel

ease

H.1

5, h

ttp

://w

ww

.fed

eral

rese

rve.

gov/

rele

ases

/h15

/dat

a.ht

m; t

otal

ass

ets

of th

e Fe

der

al R

eser

ve: “

Fact

ors

Affe

ctin

g R

eser

ve

Bal

ance

s,”

Fed

eral

Res

erve

Sta

tistic

al R

elea

se H

.4.1

, htt

p:/

/ww

w.fe

der

alre

serv

e.go

v/re

leas

es/H

41/d

efau

lt.ht

m; t

otal

dep

osits

of f

aile

d o

r as

sist

ed b

anks

: “Fe

der

al D

epos

it In

sura

nce

Cor

por

atio

n Fa

ilure

s an

d A

ssis

tanc

e Tr

ansa

ctio

ns U

nite

d S

tate

s an

d O

ther

Are

as,”

Tab

le B

F01,

FD

IC w

ebsi

te, h

ttp

://w

ww

2.fd

ic.g

ov/h

sob

; rea

l GD

P g

row

th: N

atio

nal

Inco

me

and

Pro

duc

t Acc

ount

Tab

les:

Per

cent

Cha

nge

From

Pre

ced

ing

Per

iod

in R

eal G

ross

Dom

estic

Pro

duc

t (Ta

ble

1.1

.1),

Bur

eau

of E

cono

mic

Ana

lysi

s, h

ttp

://w

ww

.bea

.go

v/iT

able

/ind

ex_n

ipa.

cfm

; une

mp

loym

ent r

ate:

“La

bor

For

ce S

tatis

tics

from

the

Cur

rent

Pop

ulat

ion

Sur

vey:

Une

mp

loym

ent R

ate,

” B

urea

u of

Lab

or S

tatis

tics,

htt

p:/

/dat

a.b

ls.

gov/

times

erie

s/LN

S14

0000

00);

infla

tion

rate

(CP

I): C

onsu

mer

Pric

e in

dex

, All

Urb

an C

onsu

mer

s (C

PI-

U),

Avg

-Avg

, Per

cent

Cha

nge,

Bur

eau

of L

abor

Sta

tistic

s, ft

p:/

/ftp

.bls

.gov

/p

ub/s

pec

ial.r

eque

sts/

cpi/c

pia

i.txt

; S&

P50

0 in

dex

: S&

P50

0 H

isto

rical

Pric

es, Y

ahoo

Fin

ance

, htt

p:/

/fin

ance

.yah

oo.c

om/q

/hp

?s=

^G

SP

C+

His

toric

al+

Pric

es.

a. A

t end

of y

ear.

b. F

or fu

ll ca

lend

ar y

ear.

TAB

LE

E-1

Fina

ncia

l cri

sis:

res

po

nse

and

rec

ove

ry in

the

Uni

ted

Sta

tes,

200

6–20

13

Page 163: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Epilogue

152

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

and very-large-scale asset purchases (known as quantitative

easing), which expanded the Fed’s balance sheet more than four-

fold from 2007 to 2013, are widely thought to have tested the

limits of monetary policy. These choices were informed by

decades of academic research, particularly in the field of eco-

nomic history, which suggested US policy responses in the early

years of the Great Depression could hardly have been worse. The

gold standard, in particular, seemed to operate as a straitjacket in

the early 1930s, forcing central bankers to tighten monetary pol-

icy at precisely the moment when markets desperately needed

additional liquidity. In fact, Bernanke had himself made impor-

tant contributions to this literature—as an economics professor

at Princeton—and thus it should not be entirely surprising that

he would chart such an aggressive course as Fed chairman in

responding to the financial crisis of 2007–2009. As a student of

both economic history and macroeconomics, he believed that

overly restrictive Fed policies in the early 1930s had proved cata-

strophic, and he was determined not to fall into the same trap.

It is still too early to say how history will judge Bernanke’s

approach to fighting the financial crisis. Critics claim that the

ultra-low interest rates and quantitative easing he helped engi-

neer will ultimately prove inflationary, and that the massive

bailouts he made possible will invite financial recklessness in the

future (as a result of moral hazard). Critics also contend that the

economy would have recovered on its own—and perhaps even

more rapidly—without these radical measures. Supporters,

meanwhile, believe that Bernanke’s bold steps helped to head off

a far more severe crisis, and perhaps even prevented a Second

Great Depression.

A similar debate has been swirling around fiscal policy as well.

Proponents maintain that fiscal expansion in the form of

increased budget deficits prevented a devastating downward

Page 164: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Epilogue

153

economic spiral and helped to get the economy moving again

after the crisis, while opponents of these intentional deficits view

them as an assault on business confidence and an unnecessary

burden on future generations of taxpayers.

It will be up to historians, over subsequent decades, to sort

out these conflicting views. At the time of this writing, however,

early indications suggest that aggressive monetary and fiscal pol-

icy may have played a positive role—and potentially a very sig-

nificant one. Diverging macroeconomic policies in Europe and

the United States in response to the financial crisis offer a pre-

cious window onto the effectiveness of alternative approaches.

In both Europe and the United States, central bankers cut

interest rates and injected large amounts of liquidity as the crisis

intensified. Policy makers in both regions also passed a variety of

stimulus packages, intentionally increasing budget deficits to

boost economic activity as demand slumped in the wake of the

crisis. But officials in the United States proved more aggressive

on both fronts. The Federal Reserve dropped short-term rates

both further and faster than did the European Central Bank.

Significantly, the ECB held more rigidly to a policy of inflation

targeting, which led it to reduce interest rates more slowly—and

even to raise rates slightly in July 2008, as the financial storm

was gaining strength—because inflation remained above its

2 percent target. Similarly, on fiscal matters, budget officials in

the United States pursued expansionary policies (that is,

increased budget deficits) on a larger scale and over a longer time

period than their counterparts in Europe, who ultimately

adopted austerity programs more quickly than in America.

Although it is still too early to draw a definitive conclusion,

more expansionary macro policies in the United States appear to

have been associated with a stronger recovery—higher GDP

growth, without significant inflation—as compared to the

Page 165: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Epilogue

154

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

euro area. Certainly, the American economic recovery remained

anemic through the end of 2013, with annual real growth rates

consistently under 3 percent. But growth was smaller still in the

euro area and even turned negative in 2012 and 2013. (For a

summary of macro policies and outcomes in the United States

and the euro area from 2006 to 2013, see table E-2.)

Notably, by the start of 2014, the British experience seemed to

fall squarely between those of the United States and the euro

area. The Bank of England reduced interest rates further and

faster than the ECB, but neither as far nor as fast as the Federal

Reserve. Similarly, British fiscal policy was arguably more expan-

sionary than in the euro area during the early stages of the crisis,

but turned toward austerity more rapidly and more decisively

than in the United States. Perhaps in part as a result, Britain’s

economic performance also occupied a middle position, with

real GDP growth slower than the United States but faster than

the euro area by 2012–2013 (see table E-2).

There is no guarantee that these trends will hold up over the

coming years. For example, the US economy could falter, while

the economies of Britain and the euro area could surge ahead.

Critics of expansionary policies claim that the American econ-

omy has become dangerously dependent on monetary and fiscal

stimulation, that ultra-low interest rates have generated a stock

market bubble, and that consumer inflation will soon rear its

ugly head in the United States. Whatever the case, it seems likely

that economic historians will look back at the years since 2007

as a grand natural experiment for assessing the effectiveness of

alternative macroeconomic responses to a financial crisis. Early

indications are that more activist policies have proved dramati-

cally more successful than the orthodox policies of the early

1930s, particularly in the United States, and that America’s more

aggressive stance (in both monetary and fiscal policy) has given

Page 166: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

TAB

LE

E-2

Mac

roec

ono

mic

po

licy

and

per

form

ance

in t

he U

nite

d S

tate

s, U

nite

d K

ing

do

m, a

nd e

uro

are

a, 2

006–

2013

Gen

eral

go

vern

men

t su

rplu

s/d

efic

it (%

GD

P)

Cen

tral

ban

k: b

ench

mar

k in

tere

st r

ate

(end

of y

ear)

Rea

l GD

P g

row

th (a

nnua

l %

cha

nge)

Co

nsum

er p

rice

infla

tio

n (a

nnua

l % c

hang

e)U

nem

plo

ymen

t ra

te

(ann

ual a

vera

ge,

%)

US

aU

Keu

ro a

rea

Fed

bU

KE

CB

US

UK

euro

are

aU

SU

Keu

ro a

rea

US

UK

euro

ar

ea

2006

−3.

1−

2.9

−1.

45.

175.

003.

502.

72.

83.

43.

22.

32.

24.

65.

58.

3

2007

−3.

7−

3.0

−0.

73.

065.

504.

001.

83.

43.

02.

92.

32.

14.

65.

47.

5

2008

−7.

2−

5.1

−2.

10.

142.

002.

50−

0.3

−0.

80.

23.

83.

63.

35.

85.

77.

5

2009

−12

.8−

11.2

−6.

40.

050.

501.

00−

2.8

−5.

2−

4.4

−0.

32.

20.

39.

37.

69.

5

2010

−12

.2−

10.0

−6.

20.

130.

501.

002.

51.

71.

91.

63.

31.

69.

67.

910

.0

2011

−10

.7−

7.9

−4.

10.

040.

501.

001.

81.

11.

63.

14.

52.

78.

98.

110

.1

2012

−9.

3−

6.2

−3.

70.

090.

500.

752.

80.

1−

0.6

2.1

2.8

2.5

8.1

7.9

11.3

2013

−6.

5−

6.9

−2.

90.

070.

500.

251.

71.

4−

0.4

1.5

2.6

1.4

7.5

7.8

12.0

Sou

rces

: OE

CD

Eco

nom

ic O

utlo

ok 9

4 D

atab

ase,

Ann

ex T

able

27

(Gen

eral

gov

ernm

ent f

inan

cial

bal

ance

s), A

nnex

Tab

le 1

(Rea

l GD

P),

Ann

ex T

able

18

(Con

sum

er p

rice

ind

ices

), A

nnex

Ta

ble

13

(Une

mp

loym

ent r

ates

: com

mon

ly u

sed

def

initi

ons)

, htt

p:/

/ww

w.o

ecd

.org

/eco

/out

look

/eco

nom

icou

tlook

anne

xtab

les.

htm

; “S

elec

ted

Inte

rest

Rat

es (D

aily

),” F

eder

al R

eser

ve

Sta

tistic

s R

elea

se H

.15,

htt

p:/

/ww

w.fe

der

alre

serv

e.go

v/re

leas

es/h

15/d

ata.

htm

; Key

EC

B In

tere

st R

ates

, Eur

opea

n C

entr

al B

ank

http

://w

ww

.ecb

.eur

opa.

eu/s

tats

/mon

etar

y/ra

tes/

htm

l/in

dex

.en.

htm

l; M

onet

ary

Pol

icy

Com

mitt

ee D

ecis

ions

, Ban

k of

Eng

land

, htt

p:/

/ww

w.b

anko

feng

land

.co.

uk/m

onet

aryp

olic

y/P

ages

/ dec

isio

ns.a

spx.

a. F

igur

es d

iffer

from

tab

le E

-1 b

ecau

se th

e d

ata

here

refle

cts

gene

ral g

over

nmen

t def

icits

(fed

eral

and

sta

te),

whe

reas

tab

le E

-1 p

rese

nts

fed

eral

def

icits

onl

y.b

. The

rat

es s

how

n he

re re

flect

the

actu

al fe

der

al fu

nds

rate

, not

the

targ

eted

rat

e.

Gen

eral

not

es: U

S fi

gure

s p

rese

nted

in th

is ta

ble

may

diff

er fr

om fi

gure

s in

tab

le E

-1 b

ecau

se m

ost c

olum

ns a

re d

raw

n fr

om a

diff

eren

t dat

a so

urce

(OE

CD

) for

eas

e of

com

par

ison

to th

e U

nite

d K

ingd

om a

nd th

e eu

ro a

rea.

Als

o, d

ata

dra

wn

from

the

OE

CD

incl

udes

par

tial e

stim

ates

for

2013

.

Page 167: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Epilogue

156

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

it an edge over Europe in recent years. But, of course, the jury is

still out.

The financial crisis of 2007–2009 leaves us with many ques-

tions: about what sorts of macroeconomic policies are most

effective, but also, perhaps, about the limits of macroeconomic

policy and macroeconomics itself. Whether effective or not, the

dramatic and unconventional measures that the Federal Reserve

deployed during and after the crisis—ranging from financial res-

cues to quantitative easing—have provoked growing debate

about the meaning of central bank independence, the limits of

technocratic solutions, and the need for democratic accountabil-

ity. In a 2013 speech about central bank independence, the for-

mer vice chairman of the Federal Reserve Board of Governors,

Donald Kohn, observed:

We are going through an extraordinary period in business

cycles and central banking. The too-calm, too-confident

veneer of the Great Moderation was shattered by the worst

financial crisis in eighty years. The Federal Reserve—indeed

central banks all over the industrial world—took

extraordinary actions to make sure the crisis was not

followed by an economic result like that of the 1930s, and

they continue to pursue policies that not so long ago would

have been considered unthinkable.

Naturally, understandably, and appropriately, these

circumstances have increased the scrutiny of central banks

and raised questions about the goals, governance, and

accountability of these institutions. . . The risks and threats

to independence have increased.4

Page 168: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Epilogue

157

The Federal Reserve’s unprecedented response to the financial

crisis, in other words, should provoke us to think in new ways

not only about the economics of monetary policy, but about the

politics—and possibly the political limits—of monetary policy

as well.

Ultimately, the crisis should remind us that macroeconomics

must be a humble discipline. The fact that the crisis seemed to

strike without warning and provoked such intense debate among

experts about how best to respond suggests, as I wrote in the

final paragraphs of the first edition, that “macroeconomics is a

very inexact science.” Although macroeconomists have a great

deal to teach us, they surely don’t have a crystal ball. We also

have to be careful not to become infatuated with the orderliness

of simple models, since the real world remains a very messy

place. A good understanding of macroeconomics can help us

think about the economy in a more systematic and more produc-

tive way, but it cannot eliminate uncertainty or the countless

shocks and surprises that shape economic life. My hope is that

readers of this volume will come to appreciate both the power

and the limits of macroeconomic thinking, particularly now, in

the wake of the financial crisis of 2007–2009.

Page 169: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know
Page 170: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

159

G l o s s a r y

actual output

See potential output.

aggregate price level

See price level.

balance of payments (Bop) accounts

Summary record of a country’s cross-border transactions,

typically over a given year. See also current account, financial

account.

balance on goods and services

Exports of goods and services minus imports of goods and

services, where “goods” refers to tangible products (merchan-

dise) and “services” refers to intangible products (such as

shipping, investment banking, or consulting services). See

also trade balance.

Page 171: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Glossary

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

160

bank run

A scenario in which a large proportion of a bank’s depositors

try to withdraw their funds at the same time, potentially

“breaking” the bank (i.e., forcing it into default).

bubble (or speculative mania)

A steep increase in asset prices not justified by economic fun-

damentals; an unsustainable increase in asset prices that may

be followed by a sudden and sharp drop (i.e., a crash).

business cycle

Temporary fluctuations in overall economic activity; temporary

departures above and below an economy’s long-term growth trend.

capacity utilization

Measures the degree to which a nation’s (or a firm’s or an

industry’s) capital stock is actually employed in the produc-

tion of output. The capacity utilization rate is the ratio of

actual output to an estimate of capacity, where capacity is

defined as maximum sustainable output given existing plant

and equipment and realistic work hours.

capital account

A line item on the balance of payments that reflects unilateral

transfers of capital, such as the forgiveness of one country’s

debts by the government of another country. Prior to the

Page 172: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Glossary

161

1990s, the “capital account” on the balance of payments

recorded all cross-border capital (financial) flows, but this

account is now called the “financial account.” See also

financial account.

central bank

Historically, a bank that provided banking services to other

banks and, often, to the government; today, a central bank is

typically the institution that exercises authority over a nation’s

monetary policy. The central bank in the United States is

called the Federal Reserve.

consumption

Component of GDP that includes all expenditures by house-

holds on new goods and services for current use.

crawling peg

See pegged exchange rate.

crowding out

The reduction in private investment that may ensue when the

government runs a budget deficit. Note that a budget deficit

(i.e., new government borrowing) implies increased govern-

ment demand for investment funds, which may “crowd out”

private investment by bidding up the interest rate faced by

private investors.

Page 173: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Glossary

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

162

currency

The most liquid form of money, including bills and coins,

typically issued by the government. Currency is said to be “in

circulation” when it is held outside of a bank vault. The term

“currency” may also be used to refer to a national unit of

account—such as the US dollar or the Mexican peso.

current account

A major item on the balance of payments that records a country’s

international transactions for current use, including net exports of

goods and services, net income, and net transfers. (Note, in the

International Monetary Fund’s revised presentation of balance of

payments [BPM6], net income and net transfers are referred to as

“primary income” and “secondary income.”) The current account

also reflects the amount of net lending to foreigners (or, in the case

of a current account deficit, net borrowing from foreigners).

cyclical fluctuations

Temporary departures from the long-term (secular) trend of

an economic variable. See also secular trend.

deficit spending

Government spending financed on the basis of borrowed

funds, rather than tax revenues.

demand deposit

A bank account, such as a checking account, in which the

deposited funds can be withdrawn or transferred by the

account holder on demand.

Page 174: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Glossary

163

depreciation

Decrease in value of fixed capital owing to wear and tear,

damage or destruction, or obsolescence. The term “deprecia-

tion” may also be used in relation to a national currency or

other financial asset to indicate decline in value due to market

conditions.

depression

An extended period of economic stagnation or contraction,

typically characterized by very low or negative real GDP

growth, high unemployment, and low capacity utilization. See

also recession.

discount rate

The rate of interest that a central bank charges on loans to

commercial banks. Traditionally, central banks made these

loans by buying assets from commercial banks at a small dis-

count—hence the term “discount rate.”

errors and omissions

A residual category on the balance of payments reflecting

statistical discrepancies in the compilation of BOP data.

exchange rate

The price of one national currency in terms of another (e.g.,

the number of Japanese yen needed to purchase 1 US

dollar).

Page 175: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Glossary

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

164

exchange rate peg

See pegged exchange rate, fixed exchange rate.

expenditure method

A method for calculating GDP, based on expenditures for final

goods and services. According to this approach a country’s

GDP equals the sum of its consumption expenditures, invest-

ment expenditures, government expenditures, and net exports

(exports minus imports).

exports

Foreign purchases of domestically produced goods and

services.

federal funds rate

A key short-term interest rate in the United States that the

Federal Reserve targets in setting monetary policy; specifically,

the rate that commercial banks in the United States charge

each other on overnight loans.

final goods and services

Output that is expected to be used (in the current year) and

not resold.

financial account

A major item on the balance of payments that records a

country’s international financial transactions, including net

flows of foreign direct investment and portfolio investment.

Page 176: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Glossary

165

fiscal policy

Use of government taxation or spending to influence macro-

economic performance (GDP growth, unemployment, infla-

tion, etc.).

fixed exchange rate

An exchange rate that is officially set by a national government

or central bank, typically by promising to buy or sell the

national currency for foreign exchange reserves, on demand,at

the fixed rate. See also floating exchange rate, gold standard.

floating exchange rate (or flexible exchange rate)

An exchange rate that is permitted to move freely (appreciate

or depreciate), based on supply and demand conditions

within the global marketplace. In a pure floating regime, the

government never uses its foreign currency reserves to stabi-

lize (or otherwise influence) the exchange rate. See also fixed

exchange rate.

foreign borrowing

Capital inflows from abroad. These inflows (or borrowing)

may take many forms, including foreign deposits in

domestic banks, foreign purchases of domestic securities

(including stocks and bonds), foreign direct investment

(including foreign purchases of domestic companies), and

so forth. A country engages in net borrowing from abroad

whenever its current account is in deficit, which broadly

indicates that the country’s expenditures exceed its

production of output.

Page 177: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Glossary

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

166

foreign direct investment (FDI)

Involves the cross-border purchase of an equity stake in a

company that is large enough (usually greater than 10 percent)

to give the foreign owner managerial influence in the com-

pany. When Daimler-Benz bought Chrysler in 1998, this rep-

resented German FDI in the United States. See also portfolio

investment.

funded pension system

A retirement program in which workers save for their own

retirement (or in which other parties, such as their employers,

save on their behalf) by purchasing financial assets, from

which the workers will derive income when they retire.

gold standard

A type of fixed exchange rate in which the price of a currency is

officially set (or fixed) in terms of gold. For example, from 1946

to 1971, the US government set the price of the US dollar at $35

per ounce of gold (although in this case only foreign central

banks—not individuals or firms—were permitted to exchange

dollars for gold at this rate). See also fixed exchange rate.

government expenditure

Component of GDP that includes all government spending on

goods and services, at all levels of government (federal, state, and

local), but does not include transfer payments (such as welfare or

social security benefits). The definition may or may not include

government spending on fixed capital stock, depending on how

Page 178: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Glossary

167

the country in question classifies government investment (i.e., as

government expenditure or as investment). See also investment.

Great Depression

The long period of economic decline and stagnation that char-

acterized the 1930s in many countries around the world.

gross domestic product (GDp)

The most widely accepted measure of a country’s total output;

often defined as the market value of all final goods and ser-

vices produced within a country over a given year. See also

gross national product, depreciation.

gross national product (GNp)

The market value of all final goods and services produced by a

country’s residents over a given year, regardless of where the

output is produced (i.e., at home or abroad). In technical

terms, gross national product (GNP) includes net income

receipts from abroad (sometimes called net international fac-

tor receipts), while gross domestic product (GDP) excludes

them. See also gross domestic product.

hot money

See portfolio investment.

imports

Domestic purchases of foreign-produced goods and services.

Page 179: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Glossary

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

168

income

Payment to labor and capital for their respective contributions

to the production of output; distributed in the form of wages

and salaries, profit, interest, rent, and royalties.

income multiplier

The ratio of expected change in GDP to the autonomous

change in expenditure used to generate it. For example, if a

$100 increase in government deficit spending ultimately leads

to a $200 increase in GDP, then the income multiplier would

be $200/$100, or 2.

inflation

An increase in the average level of prices across an economy.

The term is sometimes used as a shorthand for “consumer

price inflation,” which refers to an increase in the average level

of consumer prices (as reflected, for example, by an increase in

the cost of a representative basket of consumer goods).

inflation targeting

A monetary strategy in which a central bank aims to keep the

rate of inflation at or near a target (e.g., 2 percent), typically

by raising or lowering the short-term interest rate, as needed.

inflationary expectations

Assumptions (or predictions) about future changes in the

price level (i.e., future inflation).

Page 180: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Glossary

169

investment

Component of GDP that includes all expenditures intended to

increase future output of final goods and services. Investment

expenditures typically include business purchases of fixed

structures, equipment, software, and inventory, as well as the

cost of new owner-occupied homes. Many countries include

government investment—such as spending on new roads and

bridges—in this category, but others (including the United

States) do not.

labor productivity

See productivity.

laffer curve

A graphic representation of the relationship between tax rates

and tax revenues (originally suggested by economist Arthur

Laffer), in which revenues are shown to be zero at tax rates of

both 0 percent and 100 percent; often used to suggest that tax

revenues may rise when tax rates are reduced from sufficiently

high levels.

lender of last resort

An institution—often a public institution, such as a central

bank—that is able and willing to lend to financial institutions

(and particularly to banks) during liquidity crises, when other

potential lenders in the private sector are either unwilling or

unable to lend.

Page 181: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Glossary

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

170

liquidity trap

A scenario suggested by the British economist John Maynard

Keynes in which monetary policy could prove impotent, par-

ticularly within the context of a financial crisis. If, in the face

of very low interest rates, central bankers find it impossible to

lower interest rates further through open market purchases

(i.e., by purchasing government bonds with newly issued cur-

rency), then monetary policy will no longer be an effective

tool for stimulating additional consumption and investment.

As some economists have described it, pushing more money

at this point is about as effective as “pushing on a string.”

monetary base

Equal to the total liabilities of the central bank; includes all

currency outstanding plus commercial bank deposits at the

central bank (known as reserves).

monetary policy

The efforts of a central bank to influence economic perfor-

mance (for example, to maintain a target rate of inflation)

through manipulation of the money supply and short-term

interest rates.

money

A medium of exchange that is widely accepted as payment for

goods and services and in financial transactions; a highly liq-

uid form of wealth that is itself a means of payment or is easily

converted into a means of payment.

Page 182: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Glossary

171

money identity

M × V = P × Q, where M is the money supply, V is the velocity

of money, P is the price level, and Q is the quantity of output

produced (i.e., real GDP). See also money supply, velocity of

money, price level, real.

money illusion

A phenomenon whereby individuals confuse nominal and

real values—e. g., mistakenly view changes in their nominal

wage, uncorrected for changes in the price level (inflation or

deflation), as an accurate measure of changes in their real pur-

chasing power.

money multiplier

The ratio of the total money supply to the monetary base. If

the money multiplier is 2 and the central bank increases the

monetary base (i.e., its liabilities) by $100, then we would

expect total money supply to rise by $200. See also money

supply, monetary base.

money supply (or money stock)

The quantity of money at a particular moment in time.

Economists define a range of monetary aggregates—M1, M2,

M3, and so forth—that correspond to progressively broader

notions of money. For example, whereas M1 includes currency

in circulation and demand deposits, M2 includes currency in

circulation and demand deposits as well as time deposits (or

savings accounts).

Page 183: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Glossary

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

172

national economic accounts

Another name for the GDP accounts, which normally include

measures of GDP as well as its major components (consump-

tion, investment, government expenditure, exports, and

imports).

natural rate of unemployment

Also known as the nonaccelerating inflation rate of unemploy-

ment (NAIRU), it is the rate of unemployment below which

inflation is likely to accelerate.

net domestic product (NDp)

Gross domestic product (GDP), less depreciation of the capital

stock. See also gross domestic product.

net exports

Exports minus imports. See also exports, imports.

net factor receipts

See net income.

net income (or net factor receipts)

Income receipts minus income payments in the current

account of the balance of payments. Income receipts include

compensation paid by foreigners to domestic residents (e.g.,

for work done abroad), interest and dividends from foreign-

Page 184: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Glossary

173

ers on domestic holdings of foreign assets, and reinvested

earnings on foreign direct investment (FDI) abroad; income

payments include compensation paid to foreigners by

domestic residents (or firms), interest and dividends paid to

foreigners on foreign holdings of domestic assets, and rein-

vested earnings on FDI in the domestic economy. Net

income is referred to as “primary income” in the International

Monetary Fund’s revised presentation of balance of pay-

ments (BPM6).

net present value (NpV)

The present discounted value of the revenues from a project

minus the present discounted value of its costs; used to assess

the project’s expected profitability.

net unilateral transfers (or net transfers)

An element of the current account on the balance of payments

that reflects nonreciprocal transactions such as foreign aid or

cross-border charitable assistance (given through the Red

Cross, for example). Net transfers are referred to as “second-

ary income” in the International Monetary Fund’s revised

presentation of balance of payments (BPM6).

nominal

A measure expressed in (or relative to) current market prices

and thus uncorrected for inflation—e.g., nominal GDP, nomi-

nal wage, nominal interest rate, nominal exchange rate. See

also real.

Page 185: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Glossary

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

174

official reserves

An element of the financial account on the balance of payments

that reflects increases or decreases in the government’s stockpile

of foreign currencies (foreign exchange) and monetary gold.

open market operations

The purchase or sale of securities on the open market by the cen-

tral bank, for the purpose of raising or lowering the monetary

base (and thus lowering or raising the short-term interest rate).

output

The goods and services produced in an economy.

overheating

Rapid and unsustainable GDP growth, in which actual GDP

exceeds potential GDP; typically associated with rising inflation.

pay-as-you-go pension system

A retirement program, often run by the government, in which

benefits are paid to current retirees solely on the basis of cur-

rent contributions from—or taxes levied on—current workers

(i.e., future retirees).

pegged exchange rate

Generally the same as a fixed exchange rate (see fixed

exchange rate). However, under a “crawling peg,” the official

Page 186: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Glossary

175

exchange rate (i.e., the peg) is allowed to change gradually

over time (e.g., by a small percentage per month) and, in some

cases, is allowed to float within a narrow band, the boundaries

of which are themselves allowed to change gradually over

time.

phillips curve

A graphical representation of the apparent trade-off between

the rate of unemployment and the rate of inflation; based on

an empirical finding first highlighted by economist

A. W. Phillips.

portfolio investment (or portfolio flows)

Cross-border purchases of stocks, bonds, and other financial

instruments, but not in sufficient concentrations to allow

managerial influence. Portfolio investment is sometimes

referred to as “hot money,” since portfolio investors can often

liquidate their holdings and exit a country at almost a

moment’s notice.

potential output

The output (GDP) an economy could produce, given the

existing state of technology, if all of its resources (labor and

capital) were employed at a sustainable level of intensity.

When actual output is significantly below potential output,

the economy is said to be in recession; when actual output is

significantly greater than potential output, the economy is

said to be overheating.

Page 187: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Glossary

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

176

price deflator (or price index)

A measure of the price level. The GDP price deflator (P) equals

nominal GDP divided by real GDP. See also price level.

price level

Essentially the average of all prices (or a subset thereof) at a

given moment in time. The percentage change in the price

level from one year to the next is the annual inflation rate.

price rigidity

Prices are said to be “rigid” (or “sticky”) when they do not

immediately adjust to bring supply and demand into balance

in the face of changing market conditions.

productivity

Output per unit of input. The term is often used as a short-

hand for “labor productivity,” which is defined as output per

worker or output per worker hour. See also total factor

productivity.

purchasing power parity (ppp)

Drawn from the Law of One Price, the PPP model of exchange-

rate determination holds that a unit of currency should always

have the same purchasing power in one country as in another,

excluding transportation costs and taxes. If PPP exists between

two countries, and Country A then experiences higher infla-

tion than Country B, the PPP model predicts that Country A’s

Page 188: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Glossary

177

currency will have to depreciate relative to Country B’s until

parity is restored. One shortcoming of this model is that mar-

kets do not ensure that the Law of One Price holds for goods

and services that are not traded in the international market-

place. To address this, economists have created PPP indexes

that estimate the purchasing power of a common unit of cur-

rency (typically a dollar) with respect to all goods and

services—both those that are traded internationally (such as

cars) and those that are not (such as haircuts). If Country X

has a PPP index of 1.5 relative to the US dollar, then $1.00

worth of Currency X (at market exchange rates) would be able

to purchase goods and services in Country X worth $1.50 in

the United States. As a result, adjusting GDP per capita

according to a PPP index, rather than on the basis of market

exchange rates alone, may provide a more meaningful com-

parison of living standards across countries.

quantitative easing

Unconventional monetary measures that involve continued

open market purchases of financial assets by a central bank

even after the benchmark short-term interest rate has been

driven effectively to zero. Under conventional monetary pol-

icy, open market operations are typically used to set the

benchmark short-term interest rate (known as the federal

funds rate in the United States). In response to the financial

crisis of 2007–2009, the Federal Reserve had already pushed

the federal funds rate near zero by late 2008, yet it continued

large-scale purchases of assets (including long-term instru-

ments, ranging from mortgage-backed securities to corporate

debt to government bonds)—a policy widely characterized as

Page 189: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Glossary

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

178

“quantitative easing.” Many observers claimed that the Federal

Reserve adopted this policy in an effort to lower long-term

interest rates. The term “quantitative easing” was first used to

describe unconventional monetary measures adopted by the

Bank of Japan beginning in 2001.

rational expectations

Expectations (or forecasts) that are based on all available

information and that avoid systematic errors.

real

A measure expressed in (or relative to) constant prices, and

thus corrected for inflation (e.g., real GDP, real wage, real

interest rate, real exchange rate). See also nominal.

real exchange rate

A measure that adjusts the nominal exchange rate between

two countries to control for differences in inflation between

those two countries. If the nominal exchange rate of Currency

A in terms of Currency B has been stable, but Country A has

experienced sharply higher inflation than Country B, then

Country A’s real exchange rate will have appreciated.

recession

A period of general economic contraction, typically character-

ized by negative real GDP growth, a higher-than-normal unem-

ployment rate, and a lower-than-normal capacity utilization

Page 190: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Glossary

179

rate. Although there is no universally accepted definition of a

recession, one rule of thumb is that a recession involves at least

two consecutive quarters of negative real GDP growth.

reserve requirement

The proportion of total deposits that a bank must, by law,

hold on reserve (and thus not lend out). These reserves are

generally held as deposits at the central bank.

ricardian equivalence

The notion that individuals will react to a government budget

deficit by increasing current savings (rather than consumption),

based on their rational expectation that increased government

borrowing today will require higher taxes in the future. If true,

this response on the part of individuals would limit or poten-

tially negate the effects of expansionary fiscal policy.

secular trend

The long-term direction or trajectory of an economic variable.

See also cyclical fluctuations.

sticky wages

Wages are said to be “sticky” when they do not immediately adjust

to bring supply and demand into balance in the face of changing

market conditions. They are said to be “sticky on the downside”

when they rise more easily than they fall, even in the face of pre-

cisely opposite market pressures. See also price rigidity.

Page 191: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Glossary

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

180

total factor productivity

A measure of the efficiency with which labor and capital are

used in producing output in an economy. An increase in out-

put that is not attributable to an increase in either labor or

capital is attributed, by definition, to an increase in total factor

productivity.

trade balance

Exports minus imports. This may refer either to the balance

on goods (merchandise) or to the balance on goods and

services.

transfer payments

Payments—typically by governments in the form of welfare or

social security benefits—that are not associated with the pro-

duction of output. Transfer payments are not counted as part

of government expenditure (G) in calculating GDP.

unemployment rate

The percentage of people in the labor force who are not work-

ing but are actively looking for work.

unit labor costs (UlC)

Employee compensation per unit of output produced. Unit

labor costs rise when compensation costs increase faster than

labor productivity, and fall when compensation costs increase

more slowly than labor productivity.

Page 192: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Glossary

181

value added

The value of output as measured by its sales price, less the

cost of the nonlabor inputs used to produce it.

velocity of money

The ratio of nominal GDP (P × Q) to the money supply (M);

sometimes characterized loosely as the speed at which money

circulates within an economy.

wage and price controls

Legal restrictions on allowable movements (changes) of

wages, prices, or both.

Page 193: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

Page 194: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

183

N o t e s

Chapter one

1. Products that remain unsold are also counted as part of GDP. Specifically, they are classified as additions to business inventory and thus as an implicit form of business expenditure (investment).

2. Ideally, the electric saw would be added to national output when it was first purchased (as investment) and then gradually subtracted from output as it depreciates (that is, as it is itself consumed in the production process). This approach would yield a net measure of national output (i.e., net of depreciation), commonly called net domestic product, or NDP. Because depreciation can be difficult to measure, however, it is often ignored in calculating national output. As a result, economists and policy makers typically rely more heavily on gross domestic product (GDP) than on net domestic product (NDP).

3. It is important to remember that income is not the same as wealth. Your income is the amount you earn each year, through your employment and the distributed returns on your investments. Wealth reflects the investments themselves, derived from your accumulated savings over all previous years.

4. Another reason why countries sometimes wish to run trade surpluses (and aggressively pursue foreign markets) is to increase demand for domestically produced goods and services—or, to put it another way, to ensure an outlet for their production. We will return to the concept of aggregate demand management later in this chapter and in chapter 3.

5. The classic example of how efficiency can be increased through reorganization and specialization of tasks comes from the eighteenth-century economist Adam Smith. Smith maintained that the proper division of labor could sharply increase efficiency. Illustrating this point by describing how pins are made, he observed that “a workman not educated to this business [of pin making]. . . could scarce, perhaps, with

Notes.indd 183 19/05/14 11:53 PM

Page 195: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Notes

184

his utmost industry, make one pin in a day, and certainly could not make twenty.” He proceeded to explain, however, that when tasks were appro-priately divided and allocated among ten workers, they were able to produce “upwards of forty-eight thousand pins in a day.” The trick was for each worker to specialize: “One man draws out the wire, another straights it, a third cuts it, a fourth points it, a fifth grinds it at the top for receiving the head” and so on. See Adam Smith, An Inquiry into the Nature and Causes of the Wealth of Nations (1776), bk. I, ch. 1, para. 3.

6. Herbert Hoover, address to the American Bankers’ Association, October 2, 1930.

7. Franklin Roosevelt, inaugural address, March 4, 1933.8. John Maynard Keynes, The Means to Prosperity (New York:

Harcourt Brace, 1933).9. Some types of wealth—such as inventories of corn or other agri-

cultural products—can actually be consumed directly, but most cannot.10. International Monetary Fund, World Economic Outlook data-

base, April 2013 (estimates of GDP per capita in US$ at market exchange rates). Based on a purchasing power parity (PPP) measure, GDP per cap-ita was $369 in the Democratic Republic of the Congo and $625 in Burundi in 2012. On purchasing power parity, see chapter 5.

Chapter two

1. David Hume, “Of Money,” in Political Discourses (1752).2. It is not hard to see that the deflator had to equal 1.00 in 2005,

since we selected 2005 as the base year in this example (i.e., the year from which a constant set of prices was derived). A standard convention for presenting price deflators (in macroeconomic charts and tables) is to multiply them by 100. A deflator of 1.00 would thus be presented as 100, and a deflator of 2.00 as 200.

3. When, in rare circumstances, short-term rates exceed long-term rates, the yield curve is said to be inverted. Some economists interpret an inverted yield curve as a sign of an impending recession.

4. An annual interest rate of 1,000 percent may seem fanciful. However, loan sharks and other predatory lenders often charge exorbi-tant rates—in this range and even higher—on short-term loans to cash-starved borrowers. Note that a daily interest rate of just 0.66 percent is equivalent to an annual rate of approximately 1,000 percent. In fact, predatory lending of this sort is more common than generally thought.

Notes.indd 184 19/05/14 11:53 PM

Page 196: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Notes

185

The US Department of Defense, for example, reported in 2006 that predatory lending targeting members of the armed forces was “preva-lent.” Of particular concern were so-called payday loans, in which mili-tary personnel borrowed small sums for approximately two weeks until “the next payday” at interest rates ranging from 390 percent to 780 percent on an annual basis. See US Department of Defense, Report on Predatory Lending Practices Directed at Members of the Armed Forces and Their Dependents (Washington, DC, August 9, 2006), esp. 10.

5. Although inflations of this magnitude are rare, they are not unheard of. Since 1970, more than a dozen countries have experienced annual inflation of greater than 1,000 percent, including (among others) Angola, Argentina, Bolivia, Brazil, Democratic Republic of the Congo, Croatia, Kazakhstan, Peru, and Ukraine. During Israel’s triple-digit infla-tion of the early 1980s, an oft-repeated joke asked whether it was better to travel from Tel Aviv to Jerusalem by bus or cab. The answer: in a time of extreme inflation, it is better to travel by cab, since the traveler pays for the bus at the beginning of the trip but for the cab at the end (by which time, presumably, one’s money had already depreciated in value).

6. Under its exchange-rate peg, the Mexican central bank committed to maintain the peso–dollar exchange rate within a relatively narrow band (by agreeing to buy or sell pesos for dollars, as needed, at prices within the band). This gave many foreign investors confidence that, so long as the peg held, they would not face a sharp depreciation of the peso.

7. Irving Fisher, The Money Illusion (New York: Adelphi Co., 1928).8. Although the Federal Reserve decides how much currency will be

issued, it does not actually print the currency itself. That task is left to the US Treasury—more specifically, to the Bureau of Engraving and Printing (bills) and the US Mint (coins).

9. At the end of 2012, M1 money supply totaled approximately $2.4 trillion. A broader definition of the money supply, known as M2, includes currency in circulation and demand deposits as well as time deposits (or savings accounts). At the end of 2012, savings accounts (including small-denomination CDs and money market funds) totaled $8.0 trillion, which brought the total M2 money supply to $10.4 trillion. See Economic Report of the President 2013 (Washington, DC: Government Printing Office, 2013), tables b-69 and b-70.

10. Recall that since the interest rate may be thought of as the price of money (or, more precisely, the price of purchasing money for a period of time), an increase in the supply of money will tend to lower that price

Notes.indd 185 19/05/14 11:53 PM

Page 197: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Notes

186

(i.e., lower the interest rate), just as an increase in the supply of any good tends to lower the price of that good.

11. See Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System, press release, December 12, 2012, http://www.federalreserve.gov/newsevents/press/monetary/20121212a.htm.

Chapter three

1. Joseph F. Sullivan, “Bell Joins G.O.P. Primary for the Senate in Jersey,” New York Times, January 28, 1982.

2. Although the Bank of England became “operationally indepen-dent” in 1997 after being granted responsibility for setting short-term interest rates, it still lacked complete independence. The British government retained the authority to set the overall inflation target, which the bank was expected to meet.

3. Although Paul Volcker essentially did this in the United States in the early 1980s, he was confronting an inflation rate of less than 20 percent. In many countries, inflation rates have reached far higher levels—sometimes as high as 1,000 percent per year or more. In Brazil, for example, inflation in 1990 exceeded 2,500 percent.

4. Say himself expressed the idea this way: “[A] product is no sooner created, than it, from that instant, affords a market for other products to the full extent of its own value” [Jean-Baptiste Say, A Treatise on Political Economy, trans. C. R. Prinsep, ed. Clement C. Biddle (Philadelphia: Lippincott, Grambo & Co., 1855 [1803]): bk. I, chap. XV, para. 8]. Although the idea was developed by other classical economists (includ-ing James Mill, David Ricardo, and John Stuart Mill), the actual phrase “supply creates its own demand,” now known as Say’s law, was coined later—perhaps as late as 1936 by John Maynard Keynes, who was attack-ing the idea. See Keynes, The General Theory of Employment, Interest, and Money (New York: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1964 [1936]), 18, 25.

5. Keynes, General Theory, 30.6. Bureau of the Census, US Department of Commerce, Historical

Statistics of the United States, Colonial Times to 1970, no. 1 (Washington, DC: GPO, 1975): 1001, 1002, 1021.

7. I am deeply indebted to my former colleague, Huw Pill (who is now an official at the European Central Bank), for helping me to see that Keynes viewed expansionary fiscal policy fundamentally as a coordination device.

Notes.indd 186 19/05/14 11:53 PM

Page 198: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Notes

187

8. When central bank officials believe the economy is overheating (or is on the verge of overheating) because actual GDP exceeds (or is about to exceed) their estimate of potential GDP, they will normally raise the short-term interest under their control (i.e., tighten monetary policy) in order to fight or preempt inflation. As a result, considerable weight rests on the central bank’s estimates of potential output and its trajectory going forward. If, for example, actual output is growing at 4 percent per year and the central bank has estimated potential output growth at 3 percent per year, it is far more likely to tighten monetary policy (i.e., raise the short-term interest rate) than if it believed potential output was growing at 4.5 percent per year (which would suggest the economy had additional room to grow without overheating).

9. As is well known, bond prices and bond yields move in opposite directions. When many people want to buy bonds, this will obviously bid up their price. But this will also drive down their yields. If the price of a $100 bond that will pay $110 at the end of the year (i.e., 10 percent interest) is bid up to $105, then the effective yield is driven down to just 4.8 percent (i.e., [110 – 105]/105). Another way to look at this is that as more people want to buy bonds, a greater supply of investment funds becomes available, which in turn means that the price of those invest-ment funds (the interest rate) should fall.

Chapter Four

1. Journals of the Continental Congress, 1774–1789, ed. Worthington C. Ford et al. (Washington, DC, 1904–37), 29: 499–500.

2. Journals of the Continental Congress 30 (1786): 162–163. The Board of Treasury also noted that a “Dollar containing this number of Grains of fine Silver, will be worth as much as the New Spanish Dollars.” The so-called New Spanish Dollar, or Spanish milled dollar, was a foreign coin that was widely used as money in the United States at the time.

3. Journal of the Senate 1 (January 12, 1792): 374.4. Although attempts to measure the trajectory of prices—by track-

ing the prices of a broad basket of goods—can be traced all the way back to 1806, “the first serious attempt to summarize comprehensive price data for the United States in the form of index numbers was made by Horatio C. Burchard, Director of the Mint,” in 1881. Bureau of the Census, US Department of Commerce, Historical Statistics of the United States, Colonial Times to 1970, no. 1 (Washington, DC: GPO, 1975): 183.

Notes.indd 187 19/05/14 11:53 PM

Page 199: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Notes

188

5. Irving Fisher, “A Remedy for the Rising Cost of Living: Standardizing the Dollar,” American Economic Review 3, no. 1 (Supplement, March 1913): 20.

6. Albert Gordon, interview by author, New York City, October 22, 2003.

7. The European Central Bank might be said to have adopted a weak version of inflation targeting, based on an “inflation objective” rather than a hard target. Developed countries that had adopted even stronger versions of inflation targeting included Sweden, Britain, and New Zealand.

8. Quoted in Eldar Shafir, Peter Diamond, and Amos Tversky, “Money Illusion,” Quarterly Journal of Economics 112, no. 2 (May 1997): 341–342.

9. Ben Bernanke, the former chairman of the Federal Reserve (who was confirmed as chairman in 2006), was thought to favor explicit infla-tion targeting. By contrast, his predecessor, Alan Greenspan, had never announced an explicit inflation target.

Chapter Five

1. This chapter is drawn (with some modifications) from David Moss and Sarah Brennan, “National Economic Accounting: Past, Present, and Future,” Case 703-026 (Boston: Harvard Business School, 2002).

2. Although used goods are not included in GDP, the sale of a used good is often associated with the production of a new service, which is included. The used items sold on eBay, for example, are not counted as part of GDP. However, the commission paid to eBay for making an online auction is counted as a new service and therefore included. It is also worth noting that the components of GDP do reflect the net trans-fer of used goods across sectors of the economy. Consumption, for example, includes the purchase of used rental cars by households (Bureau of Economic Analysis, A Guide to the NIPAs, updated August 31, 2001, http://www.bea.gov/bea/an/nipaguid.htm, M.8, M.9).

3. Investment also includes the wages and salaries a business may pay to people hired as part of an investment project. For example, if a café builds a specialized high-tech coffee maker, the wages of the computer programmer will show up in investment.

4. Shelby B. Herman, “Fixed Assets and Consumer Durable Goods,” Survey of Current Business (April 2000): 18.

Notes.indd 188 19/05/14 11:53 PM

Page 200: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Notes

189

5. US Department of Commerce, National Income, Supplement to the Survey of Current Business, July 1947 (Washington, DC: GPO, 1947), 11.

6. Under the GDP definition, “net exports” is basically the balance on goods and services (from the balance of payments accounts). Under the GNP definition, by contrast, “net exports” approximately equals the balance on goods and services plus net income payments (again, from the balance of payments accounts).

7. World Development Indicators database, http://databank. worldbank.org/data/home.aspx (accessed June 2013). Note: GNP esti-mates were labeled GNI.

8. In the United States, the growth rate of the GDP deflator was often (but not always) similar in magnitude to the growth rate of the Consumer Price Index (CPI), which was constructed by tracking changes in the sales price of a fixed basket of consumer goods.

9. Arthur F. Burns, “The Measurement of the Physical Volume of Production,” Quarterly Journal of Economics 44, no. 2 (February 1930): 242–262.

10. Karl Whelan, “A Guide to the Use of Chain Aggregated NIPA Data,” Federal Reserve Board, Division of Research and Statistics, June 2000, 4–5, http://www.federalreserve.gov/Pubs/feds/2000/200035/ 200035pap.pdf.

11. J. Steven Landefeld and Bruce T. Grimm, “A Note on the Impact of Hedonics and Computers on Real GDP,” Survey of Current Business (December 2000): 17–22.

12. J. Steven Landefeld and Robert P. Parker, “BEA’s Chain Index, Time Series, and Measures of Long-Term Economic Growth,” Survey of Current Business (May 1997): 58–68.

13. World Bank, “International Comparison Program,” http:// siteresources.worldbank.org/ICPEXT/Resources/ICP_2011.html; “The International Comparison of Prices Program (ICP),” https://pwt.sas .upenn.edu/icp.html.

14. Note that net imports (i.e., IM – EX) on the GDP accounts is approximately equal to the current account deficit (excluding net income and transfers) on the balance of payments.

Chapter six

1. In practice, since official agencies don’t pick up every cross- border transaction, the “errors and omissions” category is necessary to

Notes.indd 189 19/05/14 11:53 PM

Page 201: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Notes

190

ensure that the various parts of the BOP statement do indeed sum to zero.

2. This example was inspired by a classroom exercise my colleague Louis T. Wells developed.

Chapter seven

1. Jennifer Hughes, “Online Effect Rebalances the FX Equation,” Financial Times, July 30–31, 2005.

Conclusion

1. Federal Reserve Chairman Alan Greenspan is often credited with coining the term “irrational exuberance” in a speech entitled “The Challenge of Central Banking in a Democratic Society,” which he deliv-ered at the American Enterprise Institute for Public Policy Research in Washington, DC, December 5, 1996. See also Robert Shiller, Irrational Exuberance (Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 2000).

epilogue

1. Ben S. Bernanke, “The Great Moderation” (remarks at the meet-ings of the Eastern Economic Association, Washington, DC, February 20, 2004), http://www.federalreserve.gov/BOARDDOCS/SPEECHES/ 2004/20040220/default.htm.

2. See, for example, Dirk J. Bezemer, “‘No One Saw This Coming’: Understanding Financial Crisis through Accounting Models,” working paper, June 16, 2009, table 1, p. 9, http://mpra.ub.uni-muenchen.de/15892/.

3. See David Colander et al., “The Financial Crisis and the Systemic Failure of Academic Economics” (University of Copenhagen Department of Economics Discussion Paper No. 09-03, March 9, 2009), http://ssrn.com/abstract=1355882 or http://dx.doi.org/10.2139/ssrn.1355882.

4. Donald Kohn, “Federal Reserve Independence in the Aftermath of the Financial Crisis: Should We Be Worried?,” Brookings, January 14, 2014 (based on a speech, January 13, 2013), http://www.brookings.edu/~/media/research/files/papers/2014/01/16-federal-reserve- independence-financial-crisis-kohn/16-federal-reserve-independence-financial-crisis-kohn.pdf.

Notes.indd 190 19/05/14 11:53 PM

Page 202: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

191

Note: page numbers followed by f indicate figures; page numbers followed by t indicate tables; page numbers followed by n indicate footnotes; those followed by n and a number indicate endnotes.

I n d e x

actual GDP (actual output). See output, actual vs. potential

aggregate demand, 22–26, 73–83, 137, 143, 183n4

aggregate price level. See price level (P)

American Bankers’ Association, 184n6

“autonomous” increase in government spending, 77–78, 82, 168

baby boomers, 30balance of payments, 2,

13–14, 14t, 117–130, 125–126t, 140

evolving approach to, 121n, 126–130, 128–129t

understanding debits and credits, 120–124, 122f

Balance of Payments and International Investment Position Manual, sixth edition

(BPM6), International Monetary Fund, 118n, 119, 121n, 126–130, 127t–128t, 162, 173

balance of trade. See trade balancebalance on goods and services,

118, 159, 180, 189n6banking, 55–58, 62–63, 64f, 64n,

67, 76, 90, 91, 93, 141, 150, 151t

central banks. See central bankscommercial banks. See

commercial banksbank notes, 90, 91Bank of England, 70, 154, 186n2Bank of Japan, 178bank runs (panics), 58, 93,

137, 160Berkshire Hathaway, 136Bernanke, Ben, 149, 150,

152, 188n9bimetallic standard, 91Board of Treasury, 90, 187n2Boeing, 11

Index.indd 191 20/05/14 12:56 AM

Page 203: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Index

192

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

bond prices, determination of, 187n9

BOP. See balance of paymentsBezemer, Dirk J., 190n2Brennan, Sarah, 188n1Bryan, William Jennings, 92, 94bubbles, 84, 85, 144, 149,

154, 160budget deficit/surplus, 2, 76–83,

80f, 111, 113, 146, 152–153, 161, 179. See also fiscal policy

Buffett, Warren, 136Burchard, Horatio C., 187n4Burns, Arthur, 109, 189n9business cycle, 25–26, 26f,

93–94, 160

C. See consumptionCAGR (compound annual growth

rate), 43ncapital

depreciation, 106, 163funded pension system, claim

on, 30increases in, economic growth

and, 19–21role in market economy, 29unilateral transfers of, on

balance of payments, 118capital account on balance of

payments, 13, 118, 119, 120, 125t, 127, 128t, 130, 160–161. See also financial account, on balance of payments

capital equipment, 22capital flight, 124

capital inflows and outflows, 13, 14t, 15, 115, 121–122, 122f, 124, 134, 165. See also foreign borrowing; foreign investment

CDs (certificates of deposit), 66, 185n9

central banks, 58–65, 91, 161. See also Federal Reserve; European Central Bank

control of money supply, 46, 58, 63–64, 141

credibility of, 58, 68–69, 71–72currency issuance, 55, 58,

59. See also open market operations; discount rate

discount rate, 62–63, 64f, 65, 75–76, 93, 94, 96, 141, 163

expansionary monetary policy, 73–74

independence of, 70, 141, 156, 186n2

inflationary expectations, 46, 60, 68–72, 140f, 152

inflation targeting by, 71–72, 96–98, 100, 142, 153

objectives of, 59–61open market operations,

63–65, 64f, 82, 100, 141, 170, 174, 177

overheating economy and, 59–60, 61f, 187n8

reaction to deficit spending, 82reserve requirement, 56–57,

63, 64f, 65, 141, 179certificates of deposit (CDs), 66,

185n9ceteris paribus, 65

Index.indd 192 20/05/14 12:56 AM

Page 204: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Index

193

chained method, in calculating price deflator, 110

change in reserves, 14t, 119, 120, 122f. See also balance of payments

checking account. See demand deposits

China, 51–53, 123, 127, 130, 145, 145n

Chrysler, 120, 166Coinage Act of 1792, 90coins, 34, 90, 91, 162, 185n8,

187n2Colander, David, 190n3commercial banks, 56–58, 62-63,

64f, 64n, 67, 76, 90, 91, 93, 141, 150, 151t

bank notes issued by, 90, 91borrowing from central banks,

62. See also discount ratefederal funds rate, 2, 43, 62,

64, 64n, 65, 69, 96–97role in money supply,

56–58, 141commissions, 188n1. See also

GDP accountingcomparative advantage, theory of,

16–19, 18tcompetitiveness, 23compound annual growth rate

(CAGR), 43nConstitution (US), 90Consumer Price Index (CPI),

151t, 189n8. See also implicit price deflator; price index

consumption, 10–11, 14t, 103–104, 104t, 109–110

definition of, in GDP accounting, 103, 188n2

direct consumption of wealth, 184n9

encouragement of, through monetary policy, 73–74

of fixed capital, 106, 107. See also depreciation, in GDP accounting

rising GDP and, 77–78substitution effect, 110vs. investment of current

output, 29, 34–35, 113, 114t, 184n9

Continental Congress, 90, 187n1, 187n2

CPI (Consumer Price Index), 151t, 189n8. See also implicit price deflator; price index

crawling peg. See pegged exchange rate

credibilityof central banks, 58, 68–69,

71–72of government, 70–71

cross-country comparisons, of GDP, 108–110

crowding-out, 82, 161currency. See also bank notes;

exchange rates; money; money supply (M)

component of money supply, 56, 185n9

issued by central banks, 56, 185n8

issued by commercial banks in form of bank notes, 90, 91

currency crises, 2, 49–50, 115currency trading, 84, 94, 134,

143. See also exchange rates

Index.indd 193 20/05/14 12:56 AM

Page 205: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Index

194

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

current account balance, on balance of payments, 13–14, 14t, 15, 28n, 115, 118, 119, 121, 123, 124–126t, 127, 128t, 130, 131–133, 136, 137, 162, 165, 172, 173, 189n14

debits and credits in, 120–124, 122f

exchange rates and, 131–133, 136, 137

IMF approach to. See Balance of Payments and International Investment Position Manual, sixth edition (BPM6)

line items in, 118–119cyclical (short-term) fluctuations,

26n, 162

Daimler-Benz, 120, 166deficit spending, 76–83, 137. See

also budget deficit/surplus; fiscal policy

crowding-out, 82, 161waning faith in, 81during World War II, 80

deflation, 36, 38f, 54–55, 75–76, 75t, 92, 97, 98, 109, 137, 146, 171

deflator. See implicit price deflatordemand. See aggregate demand;

Say’s lawdemand deposits, 56–57, 63, 66,

90, 141, 162, 171, 185n9depreciation, in GDP accounting,

102, 106–107, 183n2depreciation of currency. See

exchange rates

depression. See also recessionin 1930s. See Great Depressioncauses of, 22–26expectations as cause of, 24monetary policy impotent

in, 74Dewing, Arthur, 94–95Diamond, Peter, 188n8direct investment. See foreign

direct investment (FDI)disasters, 106discount rate, 62–63, 64f, 65,

75–76, 93, 94, 96, 141, 163discount window, 65, 93division of labor, efficiency and,

183–184n5dollar. See also currency; exchange

rates; money; money supply (M)

proposed standardization of, 92–93, 188n5

Spanish milled dollar, 187n2as unit of account, 90, 91, 98,

162, 187n2double counting, 8, 10–11, 103downward spiral, 25, 73, 143,

152–153

eBay, 188n2economic growth

productivity and, 22–23, 183–184n5

sources of, 19–21, 183–184n5economic relationships, theory vs.

practice, 54, 65–66, 147economic shocks, 25, 72,

137, 157education and productivity, 23

Index.indd 194 20/05/14 12:56 AM

Page 206: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Index

195

efficiencydivision of labor and,

183–184n5increases in, economic growth

and, 19–20reduced, through wage and

price controls, 70total factor productivity (TFP)

as measure of, 20, 21, 22, 23n

“elastic” money supply, 93–94errors and omissions, on balance

of payments, 119, 120, 123–124, 127, 129t, 130, 163, 189–190n1

European Central Bank (ECB), 72, 97, 153, 154, 188n7

European Union, 97, 153–154EX. See exports (EX)exchange, money used to facili-

tate, 33, 194n1exchange-rate models, 133,

134–135exchange-rate peg. See fixed

exchange rate; pegged exchange rate

exchange rates, 1, 4, 34, 35–36, 35n, 37–38, 37f, 38f, 47–53, 83, 84, 91–97, 131–137

bimetallic standard, 91currency crises, 2, 49–50, 115current account balance and,

132–133, 136, 137determination of, 131–137effects of money on. See moneyexpectations and, 83, 84fixed, 91–95, 165, 166, 174.

See also exchange-rate peg; pegged exchange rate

floating, 95, 165forecasting, unpredictability

of, 136foreign investment and, 51–53gold standard. See gold

standardinflation and. See real

exchange rateinterest rates and, 134–135, 137monetary policy goals and, 60,

140f, 142nominal vs. real, 46–53, 50tpegged, 49, 51, 174–175,

185n6. See also fixed exchange rate

real, 2, 46–53, 50tand trade balance, 47–50

expansionary fiscal policy. See fiscal policy

expansionary monetary policy. See monetary policy

expectations, 2, 3, 67–85, 137, 139, 143–144, 147

as cause of recessions and depressions, 24–25

fiscal policy and, 76–83, 79f, 80f, 140f, 146

inflation and, 46, 47f, 60–61, 62, 68–72, 85, 140f, 168

“irrational exuberance,” 140f, 144, 190n1

monetary policy and, 73–76, 75t, 83, 84, 140f, 146

output and, 26, 73–83rational, 81–82, 178, 179self-fulfilling, 24, 67, 143

“expectations-augmented” Phillips curve, 61

Index.indd 195 20/05/14 12:56 AM

Page 207: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Index

196

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

expenditures. See GDP accounting; income multiplier

expenditure method, in GDP accounting, 9–10, 11, 77, 102–106, 104t, 105–106, 164

exports (EX), 10, 12, 13, 14t, 15, 36, 47, 48, 61, 77, 91, 103–106, 113, 114t, 117, 121, 122t, 123, 124, 125t, 127, 128, 129t, 130, 140, 159, 164. See also net exports; trade, international

factor receipts. See income receipts and payments

factors of production, 11FDI (foreign direct investment),

14t, 51–52, 118, 120, 164, 165, 166, 173

federal deposit insurance, 58federal funds rate, 2, 43, 62, 64,

64n, 65, 69, 96–97, 150, 164, 177

Federal Reserve, 2, 55, 65, 66, 70, 75, 84, 93–100, 142, 149, 150–157, 161, 185n8, 186n11, 190n1. See also central banks

control of federal funds rate, 64–65, 64n, 69, 96–97, 164

establishment of (1914), 70, 93–95

financial crisis of 2007–2009 and, 43, 59, 62, 72, 97, 142, 149–157, 177–178

inflation targeting by, 72, 96–98, 100, 143, 164, 168, 188n9

final goods and services, 9–10, 11, 39, 41, 102–103, 107

financial account, on balance of payments, 13, 14t, 15, 118, 119–120, 121, 121n, 122–123, 124, 127, 128t, 129, 130, 132, 161, 164. See also balance of payments

financial bubbles. See bubblesfinancial crises. See also

depression; recessionand balance of payments, 124bank runs (panics), 58, 93,

137, 160currency crises, 2, 49–50, 115financial crisis of 2007–2009,

2, 43, 58–59, 62, 72, 83, 84, 97, 141–142, 149–157, 177

influence on exchange rates, 141–142

financial stability, and monetary policy, 62, 72, 100, 142

fiscal policy, 4, 25–26, 60, 68, 76–83, 80f, 140f, 146, 150, 152–154, 179, 186n7. See also deficit spending; Keynes, John Maynard

Fisher, Irving, 55, 92–93, 185n7, 188n5

fixed exchange rate, 91–95, 165, 166, 174

fixed-price method, 109–110floating exchange rate, 95, 165Ford, Worthington C., 187n1forecasting, 103, 136, 178

Index.indd 196 20/05/14 12:56 AM

Page 208: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Index

197

foreign borrowing, 12–13, 28–29, 28f, 111, 113, 114–115, 114t, 121, 144–145, 165. See also financial account, in balance of payments

foreign direct investment (FDI), 14t, 51–52, 118, 120, 164, 165, 166, 173

foreign investment. See also foreign borrowing; foreign direct investment

interest rates and, 134pegged exchange rates

and, 49, 51, 174–175, 185n6

real exchange rates and, 51–53foreign trade. See trade,

internationalfree trade, 16–19. See also

comparative advantage, theory of; trade

Friedman, Milton, 60, 95, 98funded pension system,

30–32, 166

G. See government expenditureGDP. See GDP accounting; gross

domestic product (GDP)GDP accounting, 8–11, 14t,

101–115balance of payments account-

ing and, 117commissions and, 188n1controlling for inflation,

108–110depreciation and, 102,

106–107, 183n2

expenditure method, 9–10, 11, 77, 102–106, 104t, 105–106, 164

GNP and, 107–108income method, 11, 102, 103investment, savings, and foreign

borrowing, 111–113, 114tmeasurement approaches,

8–11, 10f, 102–103purchasing power parity and,

110–111, 112tGDP deflator. See implicit price

deflatorGDP per capita

as measure of standard of living, 29

PPP-adjusted estimates, 112t, 177, 184n10

General Motors, 107General Theory of Employment,

Interest, and Money, The (Keynes), 186n4, 186n5

GNP. See gross national product (GNP)

GNP-to-GDP ratios, 107–108gold standard, 75, 90, 91–95,

98–99, 150, 152, 166. See also exchange rates, fixed

goods and services. See balance payments; current account balance; GDP accounting; output

Gordon, Albert, 188n6government. See also central

banks; Federal Reserve; fiscal policy; monetary policy

attempts to influence investment, 29

Index.indd 197 20/05/14 12:56 AM

Page 209: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Index

198

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

government (continued)credibility of, wage and price

controls and, 70–71role in early US monetary

system, 90–91government bonds, 43, 64, 75,

82, 141. See also open market operations

government expenditure (G), in GDP accounting, 10, 11, 14t, 103, 104t, 113, 114t, 115, 166. See also GDP accounting

“autonomous” increase in, 77–78, 82, 168

deficit spending. See deficit spending; fiscal policy

government-led investment, 21government saving (budget

surplus), 113, 114tgovernment spending. See

government expenditure (G)Great Depression, 94, 146, 150, 152,

154, 167. See also depressioncauses of, 23–24effects on cost of borrowing,

75–76gold standard and, 94–95, 152

Greenspan, Alan, 188n9, 190n1Grimm, Bruce T., 189n11gross domestic product (GDP),

8–11, 14t, 101–115, 139–140. See also GDP accounting; national output

actual and potential GDP compared, 73, 140f, 143–144, 175, 187n8

comparison of nominal vs. real GDP, 39–43, 43t, 44t, 108–110, 140

components of, 10, 104–106, 104tcontrolling for inflation in

measurement of, 40, 43–44, 108–110, 141

vs. domestic expenditure, 115GNP compared, 107–108historical and cross-country

comparisons, 108–110increase in, income multiplier

and, 77–79, 79fitems excluded from, 106, 107,

109, 188n2PPP-adjusted estimates of GDP

per capita, 111, 112treal. See real GDPstandard definition of, 10,

102–103, 167gross national product (GNP),

107–108, 109, 167, 189n6

Harvard Business School, 3, 94Herman, Shelby B., 188n4Honda, 12Hoover, Herbert, 24, 184n6“hot money,” 120, 175. See also

portfolio investmentHughes, Jennifer, 190n1Hume, David, 33, 194n1

I. See investmentIM. See imports (IM)IMF (International Monetary

Fund), 118n, 119, 120, 121n, 126–127, 130, 162, 173. See also Balance of Payments and International Investment Position Manual, sixth edition (BPM6)

Index.indd 198 20/05/14 12:56 AM

Page 210: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Index

199

implicit price deflator (or price deflator), 36, 37f, 41, 42t, 95n, 109, 176, 184n2, 189n8. See also inflation; price index; price level (P)

imports (IM), 10, 11, 12, 13, 14t, 47, 48, 51, 77, 81, 91, 104t, 105, 113, 114t, 115, 117, 121, 122f, 124, 125t, 127, 128t, 129, 133, 159, 164, 167, 172, 180, 189n14

income, 168as compared to product,

107–108, 113from cross-border investments.

See income receipts and payments

factors of production and, 11measurement of total

income, 102multiplier, 76–83, 79f, 143,

168. See also fiscal policypersonal, individual output

and, 14–15wealth contrasted, 183n3

income-expenditure cycle, leakage from, 78–79, 81–82

income method, in GDP accounting 11, 102, 103

income multiplier, 76–83, 79f, 143, 168. See also fiscal policy

income receipts and payments, on balance of payments ( investment income, factor receipts, and payments), 14, 107, 113, 114t, 117, 118, 119, 121, 122f, 125t, 167, 172. See also balance of payments

independence of central banks, 70, 141, 156, 186n2. See also central banks

individual retirement accounts (IRAs), 30–32

inflation. See also aggregate price level; Consumer Price Index; implicit price deflator; price index

controlling GDP for, 40, 43–44, 108–110, 141

defined, 36, 168effect on daily lives, 1and exchange rates, 46–53, 50t,

53f, 133–134, 137expectations and, 46, 47f,

50–61, 62, 68–72, 85, 140f, 168

fiscal policy and, 80, 80f, 81, 82

and gold standard, 91–94hyperinflation, 185n5,

186n3inflation targeting, 71–72,

96–98, 100, 142, 143, 153, 164, 168, 186n2, 188n7, 188n9

and interest rates (nominal vs. real), 43–46, 46f, 47f, 75, 144

monetary policy and, 38, 59–61, 68–72, 93–98, 141, 142, 146, 170, 186n3

Phillips curve and, 60–61, 61f, 175

real vs. nominal, 39–54, 140f, 141, 144–145

and unemployment, 60–61, 61f, 175

Index.indd 199 20/05/14 12:56 AM

Page 211: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Index

200

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

inflationary expectations. See expectations, inflation and

inflationary spiral, preventing, 70–71

inflation targeting, 71–72, 96–98, 100, 142, 143, 153, 164, 168, 186n2, 188n7, 188n9

Inquiry into the Nature and Causes of the Wealth of Nations, An (Smith), 183–184n5

intangible products (services), 119

interest rate parity model, 134–135interest rates

crowding-out, 82, 161defined, 34–35, 161demand for money and, 66and effect on daily lives, 1exchange rates and, 134–135,

137, 144–145expectations and, 73–75, 83long-term, 39, 43, 46, 83, 143,

178, 184n3nominal vs. real, 42–46, 46t,

47f, 75, 75t, 76, 144monetary policy and, 37, 38,

46f, 58–65, 66, 68–73, 93, 95–97, 100, 134–136, 137, 140–142, 150, 152, 153, 154, 164, 168, 170, 177–178, 185–186n10

real. See interest rates, nominal vs. real

short-term. See short-term interest rates

intermediate goods, 102international comparisons of GDP

per capita, 108–110

international exchange of output. See trade, international

international lending and borrowing. See foreign borrowing; foreign direct investment; foreign investment

International Monetary Fund (IMF), 118n, 119, 120, 121n, 126–127, 130, 162, 173

internet bubble, 84inventory, additions to, 183n1inverted yield curve, 184n3investment, 169. See also GDP

accounting; foreign direct investment; foreign investment

additions to inventory as, 183n1

and balance of payments accounting, 118–124, 122t

crowding-out, 82, 161definition of, in GDP

accounting, 10, 28, 103, 104t, 105, 106, 107, 111–113, 120, 164, 172, 183n3

depreciation, 102, 106, 183n2

and expectations, 24–25, 73, 143

fiscal policy and, 76–77, 81–82, 143, 146

government-led, 21and growth, 19–23monetary policy and, 69,

73–76, 142portfolio investment. See

portfolio investment

Index.indd 200 20/05/14 12:56 AM

Page 212: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Index

201

sources of, 28, 28f, 111–115, 113t

vs. consumption of current output, 15, 27–29, 31, 113, 114t, 184n9

investment tax credits, 29IRAs (individual retirement

accounts), 30–32“irrational exuberance,” 140f,

144, 190n1Irrational Exuberance (Shiller),

190n1island economy (nominal

vs. real GDP), 39–41, 40t, 42t

Japan, 12–13, 35n, 47–49, 48t, 50t, 107, 178

Kemmerer, E. W., 99Keynes, John Maynard, 24, 25,

73, 74, 76–77, 78, 79, 80–81, 82, 83, 146, 170, 186n4, 186n7

Keynesian fiscal policy, 25, 77–83, 79f, 80f, 143, 146. See also fiscal policy

Kohn, Donald, 156, 190n4

labordivision of, efficiency and,

183–184n5increases in, economic growth

and, 19–20, 21pension system claim on, 30

labor productivity, 22–23, 23n

Landefeld, J. Steven, 189n11, 189n12

Law of One Price, 133, 134, 137, 176, 177

leakagefrom deposit and lending

process (money multiplier), 57–58, 63

from income-expenditure cycle (income multiplier), 78–79, 81–82

lendingby commercial banks, 42–43,

56–57, 75–76, 96by central bank, 56–57,

62–65, 96international (or foreign). See

foreign borrowing; foreign investment

leakage from deposit and lending process, 57–58, 63

payday loans, 185n4predatory lending, 184–185n

Leonhardt, David, 136nliquidity trap, 74, 170long-term (secular) trends,

26n, 179

M. See money supply (M)macroeconomics

core concepts of, 139–146, 130fexchange rates. See exchange ratesexpectations and. See

expectationsfiscal policy. See deficit

spending; fiscal policy; Keynes, John Maynard

importance to managers, 1–2

Index.indd 201 20/05/14 12:56 AM

Page 213: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Index

202

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

macroeconomics (continued)inflation. See inflationinterest rates. See interest ratesmacroeconomic accounting. See

GDP accounting; balance of payments

monetary policy. See central banks; monetary policy

money and. See moneyoutput and. See outputpractical value of, 2unemployment. See

unemploymentuses and misuses of, 146–148

“Macro M,” 140fMeans to Prosperity, The (Keynes),

184n8Mexico, 2, 49–50, 115, 129–130,

162, 185n6Mill, James, 185n4Mill, John Stuart, 185n4monetarists, 95nmonetary base, 59, 62–63, 64f,

170, 171, 174monetary policy, 25–26, 36–38,

55–65, 68–72, 73–76, 89–100, 140f, 141–142, 149–150, 153, 154, 157, 161, 170, 187n8. See also central banks; Federal Reserve; inflation; money

basic tools of, 62–65, 64f, 141–142

discount rate. See discount rateeffect on exchange rates,

37–38, 60, 98, 140f, 142effect on interest rates. See

interest rates, monetary policy and

establishment of US currency, 90–91

expectations and, 73–76, 75t, 83, 84, 140f, 146

Federal Reserve. See Federal Reserve

gold standard. See gold standardhistory of, in United States,

89–100objectives of, 59–61, 142open market operations, 63–64,

64f, 65, 96, 100, 141, 174quantitative easing and, 59, 65,

142, 152, 156, 177–178reserve requirement, 56–57,

63, 64f, 65, 141, 179short-term interest rates as key

monetary instrument, 58–59, 65, 96, 97, 100, 141, 153, 168, 170, 187n8

monetary targets, 65monetized economy, 34money, 3, 33–66, 68–72, 73–76,

89–100, 140–143, 170. See also central banks; monetary policy; money supply (M)

banking and, 55–58central banks, 58–65. See also

central banksFederal Reserve. See Federal

Reservegold standard. See gold

standardhistory of, in United States,

89–100hot money, 120, 175interest rates and. See interest

ratesmoney demand, 66, 71, 74, 93

Index.indd 202 20/05/14 12:56 AM

Page 214: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Index

203

money identity, 171Phillips curve, 60–61, 61f, 175“prices” of, 34, 36–37, 37f,

185n10sticky wages and money

illusion, 54–55velocity of, 95n, 171, 181

money identity, 171money illusion, 54–55, 171Money Illusion, The (Fisher), 185n7money market funds, 185n9money multiplier, 57, 62, 63, 171money supply (M). See also

central banks; monetary policy; money

banking and, 55–58central banking and, 58–65,

69, 73–74, 95–96, 141. See also central banks

and creation of Federal Reserve, 93–95

effect on consumption and investment, 73–74

effect on interest rate, exchange rate, inflation, 37–38, 38f, 49, 46, 47f, 53–54, 53f, 65–66, 71, 140–141, 170

and gold standard, 90–91government management of,

37, 141M1, 56–58, 63, 95, 171, 185n9M2, 171, 185n9M3, 171in monetarist approach, 95n

Moss, David, 188n1M1 money supply, 56–58, 63, 95,

171, 185n9M2 money supply, 171, 185n9M3 money supply, 171

national economic accounting. See GDP accounting

national output. See gross domestic product (GDP); output

national savings. See savingsnatural disasters, 22–23, 24, 106natural rate of unemployment,

60–61, 172NDP. See net domestic product

(NDP)net capital account, 118. See also

balance of paymentsnet current transfers, 119. See also

balance of paymentsnet domestic product (NDP), 106,

107, 172, 183n2net exports, 10, 77, 103, 104t,

106, 107, 172, 189n6. See also balance of payments; GDP accounting

net factor receipts. See net incomenet imports, 115, 189n14. See

also foreign borrowingnet income (net factor receipts),

118, 172. See also income receipts and payments, on balance of payments

net international factor payments, 107, 167. See also income receipts and payments, on balance of payments

net present value (NPV), 74, 173net unilateral transfers (net

transfers), 14t, 118, 119, 121, 125t, 162, 173, 188n2. See also balance of payments

New Spanish Dollar, 187n2Nixon, Richard, 81

Index.indd 203 20/05/14 12:56 AM

Page 215: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Index

204

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

nominal exchange rates. See exchange rates

nominal GDP. See gross domestic product (GDP)

nominal interest rates. See interest rates

nominal vs. real dichotomy, 39–54, 140f, 141, 144–145, 171

nonaccelerating inflation rate of unemployment (NAIRU), 172

NPV (net present value), 74, 173

official reserves, on balance of payments, 14t, 119, 120, 122f, 174. See also balance of payments

oil shocks, 72, 137open market operations, 63–65,

64f, 82, 96, 100, 141, 170, 174, 177. See also central banks; monetary policy

open market purchase. See open market operations

open market sale. See open market operations

output, 3, 4, 7–32, 40, 45, 69, 73–83, 95n, 100, 101–115, 139–140, 140f, 144–145, 147–148, 183n2, 187n8. See also gross domestic product (GDP); real GDP

actual vs. potential, 21, 22–26, 31, 40, 73, 140f, 143–144, 175, 187n8

expectations and, 23–24, 73–83, 143–144, 146

future, financial assets as claim on, 27

growth of, 19–21measurement of. See GDP

accountingquantity of (Q), 40–41, 43,

79–80, 95nrecessions and depressions,

23–26, 73–83wealth and, 27–32

over-counting problem, 8–11. See also GDP accounting

overheating economybudget surplus to cool, 80,

80f, 146gold standard and, 90–91Keynesian fiscal stimulus and,

80f, 144monetary policy and, 59–60,

61f, 187n8and Phillips curve, 61f

overnight bank rate, 43, 58, 64, 64n, 96, 164. See also federal funds rate

P. See implicit price deflator; price index; price level

panics (bank runs), 58, 93, 137, 160

paper currency, 34, 55, 90, 91, 185n8

Parker, Robert B., 189n12pay-as-you-go pension systems,

30–32, 174payday loans, 185n4payroll taxes, 30, 32pegged exchange rate, 49, 51,

174–175, 185n6. See also exchange rates, fixed

pension systems, 30–32, 174

Index.indd 204 20/05/14 12:56 AM

Page 216: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Index

205

Phelps, Edmund, 60Phillips, A. W., 60, 175Phillips curve, 60–61, 61f, 175Pill, Huw, 186n7portfolio investment (portfolio

flows), 14t, 49, 118, 120, 129, 129t, 130, 164, 175. See also balance of payments

potential output, 21, 25, 26, 73, 140f, 143–144, 175, 187n8. See also output, actual vs. potential

PPP. See purchasing power parity (PPP)

precious metals, 90, 91–92, 98. See also gold standard; silver

predatory lending, 184–185nprice deflator. See implicit price

deflator; price level (P)price flexibility, 25price index, 108, 171n8. See also

Consumer Price Index; implicit price deflator; inflation; price level (P)

price level (P), 34, 36, 37f, 38, 38f, 40, 54, 68, 79–80, 92, 93, 95, 95n, 98–99, 108–110, 140–142. See also implicit price deflator; inflation

price rigidity (stickiness), 25, 26, 54–55, 176

prices. See also implicit price deflator; inflation; price level (P); monetary policy; price index

constant set of, in calculating GDP. See real GDP

flexibility of. See price flexibility; price rigidity

of money. See money, “prices” ofand trade. See exchange rates

Princeton University, 96private savings (S), 113, 114t. See

also savingsproductivity, 1, 16–19, 20,

22–23, 107, 176, 180labor productivity, 16–19, 18t,

22–23, 23n16, 176, 180total factor productivity (TFP),

20, 21, 22, 23n, 180public policy. See also fiscal

policy; monetary policyand economic growth, 21imposition of wage and price

controls, 70–71purchasing power parity (PPP),

110–111, 112t, 127, 184n10cross-country comparisons of

GDP, 108–110exchange rates and, 133–134

Q. See real GDPquantitative easing, 59, 65, 142,

152, 156, 177–178quantity of output (Q). See real GDP

rational expectations, 81–82, 178, 179

real. See nominal vs. real dichotomy

real estate bubble, 84real exchange rate, 2, 46–53, 50t,

53f, 69, 178and foreign investment, 49–53

Index.indd 205 20/05/14 12:56 AM

Page 217: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Index

206

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

real GDP, 22, 26, 26f, 39–43, 69, 79, 80, 80f, 95, 95n, 108–110, 115, 141, 143, 146, 151t, 154, 155t, 178

calculation of, 109–110nominal GDP vs., 39–43,

42t, 43treal interest rate, 42–46, 46f, 75t,

76, 178under conditions of deflation,

75–76, 75fnominal interest rates vs.,

42–46, 46t, 47f, 75, 75t, 76, 144

recession, 22–26, 61f, 67, 82–83, 184n3

budget deficits during, 82–83causes of, 22–26defined, 26n, 178–179and inverted yield curve,

184n3Reinhardt, Forest, 23nrepatriation, effect of real

exchange rate on, 51–52reserve requirement, 56–57,

63, 64f, 65, 141, 179gold standard and, 94as tool of monetary policy, 63,

64f, 65, 141retirement, and pension reform,

30–32Ricardian equivalence,

82, 179Ricardo, David, 16–17, 82,

186n4Roosevelt, Franklin D., 24, 94,

184n1Rubin, Robert, 136

S (private savings). See savingsSamuelson, Paul, 19savings, 1, 28–29, 28f, 31–32, 66,

74, 81, 113–114, 114t, 171, 183n3, 185n9

Say, Jean-Baptiste, 73, 186n4Say’s law, 73, 186n4seasonal demand for money, 93secular (long-term) trends, 26n,

179self-fulfilling expectations, 24, 67,

143shadow banks, 58Shafir, Eldar, 188n8Shiller, Robert, 190n1short-term (cyclical) fluctuations,

26n, 162short-term interest rates, 39, 43,

46, 58–59, 65, 96, 184n3, 186n2

controlling through open mar-ket operations, 96, 97, 174, 177. See also open market operations

federal funds rate. See federal funds rate

as instrument of monetary pol-icy, 58–59, 65, 96, 97, 100, 141, 153, 168, 170, 187n8

silver, 90, 91, 187n2Smith, Adam, 183–184nSocial Security benefits, 32, 105,

166, 180Spanish milled dollar, 187n2specialization, 16–17, 19, 183n5speculative mania, 84, 85, 149,

154, 160stagflation, 61

Index.indd 206 20/05/14 12:56 AM

Page 218: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Index

207

sticky prices and wages, 25, 54–55, 176, 179

subprime mortgage lending, 84, 149

substitution effect, 110Sullivan, Joseph F., 186n1supply creates its own demand.

See Say’s lawsupply-side economics, 21, 25

T. See taxestaxes (T), 32, 76, 77, 81–82, 83,

113, 114t, 150, 166. See also GDP accounting; tax rates

tax rates, 21, 29, 32, 77, 169TFP. See total factor productivity

(TFP)theory of comparative advantage.

See comparative advantage, theory of

time deposits, 171, 185n9. See also M2 money supply

time value of money, 35total factor productivity (TFP),

20, 21, 22, 23n, 26, 180Toyota, 12, 107Tr (transfer payments), 105, 113,

166, 180. See also GDP accounting

trade, international, 11–18, 47–50, 111, 127–129, 144–145, 177, 183n4. See also balance of payments; comparative advantage, theory of; exports; imports; net exports

trade balance, 12–13, 47–50, 48t, 91–92, 133, 134, 144–145, 159, 180. See also balance of payments; current account balance; trade, international

on balance of payments, 13–15, 14t, 118, 127–129

effect of inflation on, 91–92, 133

exchange rates and, 47–53, 48t, 50t, 83–84, 131–132

trade deficit, 13, 44, 84, 144–145. See also trade balance

trade surplus, 12–13. See also trade balance

transfer payments (Tr), 105, 113, 166, 180. See also GDP accounting

Tversky, Amos, 188n8

ULC (unit labor costs), 23, 180unemployment, 1, 25, 26f, 54,

59, 60–62, 69, 72, 73, 79, 80f, 94, 96, 142, 143, 146, 151t, 155t, 163, 165, 172, 175, 178, 180. See also depression; recession

Keynesian fiscal policy and, 79, 80f

monetary policy and, 59, 60, 61, 62, 69, 72, 142–143

natural rate of, 60–61, 172Phillips curve on inflation and,

60–61, 61f, 175wage stickiness and, 54–55

Index.indd 207 20/05/14 12:56 AM

Page 219: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Index

208

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

unilateral transfers, 14f, 74t, 118, 119, 121, 125t, 162, 173, 188n. See also balance of payments

United KingdomBank of England, 70, 154,

186nand comparative advantage,

16–19inflation targeting, 188n7

United States, 11–13, 20, 21, 23–26, 26t, 28f, 29, 43, 47–50, 51, 55, 62, 64–65, 70, 74–75, 83, 84, 89–100, 104t, 105, 107, 108, 111, 120, 123, 127, 128–129t, 133–134, 141, 145, 150, 151t, 153–154, 155t, 161, 164, 166, 169, 177, 187n4

balance of payments, 1970–2010, 125–126t

GDP growth in, 26f, 42, 42t, 189n9

GDP per capita, 29, 112t, 177, 184n10

GNP-to-GDP ratio, 108and Great Depression, 23–24,

75–76, 94–95, 152, 167history of money and monetary

policy in, 70, 75, 80–81, 89–100, 169n2, 169n4, 186n3, 187n2

increased entry of women into workforce, 20

interest rates in 2005, 42–43savings and investment in, 28,

28f, 114tunit labor costs (ULC), 23, 180

unit of account, 90, 91, 98, 162. See also money

University of Pennsylvania, 111unsold goods in GDP accounting,

182n1US Bureau of Economic Analysis

(BEA), 126–127, 127n, 188n2

US Bureau of Engraving and Printing, 185n8

US Department of Commerce, 106, 107, 109–110, 186n6, 187n4, 189n5

US Department of Defense, 185n4US Mint, 185n8, 187n4US Treasury, 2, 185n8used goods, and GDP accounting,

188n2

V (velocity of money), 95n, 171, 181

value-added approach, in GDP accounting, 8–9, 10f, 11, 102, 103, 181. See also GDP accounting, measurement approaches

velocity of money (V), 95n, 171, 181

virtuous circle, 78, 146Volcker, Paul, 69, 186n3

wage and price controls, 70–71, 181

wages (salaries), 11, 14, 22, 23, 25, 45, 52, 54–55, 60, 68, 70, 102, 119, 141, 143, 168, 179, 188n3

Index.indd 208 20/05/14 12:56 AM

Page 220: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Index

209

wealth, 27–29, 32–33, 183n3, 184n9

Wealth of Nations. See An Inquiry into the Nature and Causes of the Wealth of Nations (Smith)

welfare payments, 103, 105, 166Wells, Louis T., 190n2

Whelan, Karl, 189n1World Bank, 189n13World Development Indicators

database, 189n7World War II, 80–81, 95

yield curve, inverted, 184n3

Index.indd 209 20/05/14 12:56 AM

Page 221: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

Index.indd 210 20/05/14 12:56 AM

Page 222: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

211

A b o u t t h e A u t h o r

David A. Moss is the John G. McLean Professor at Harvard Business

School. He earned his BA from Cornell University (1986) and his

PhD from Yale University (1992). After graduating from Yale,

Moss served as a senior economist at Abt Associates, a public pol-

icy consulting firm based in Cambridge, Massachusetts. He joined

the Business School faculty in July 1993.

Professor Moss has authored two previous books: Socializing

Security: Progressive-Era Economists and the Origins of American

Social Policy (Harvard University Press, 1996) and When All Else

Fails: Government as the Ultimate Risk Manager (Harvard University

Press, 2002). The latter explores the government’s pivotal role as

a risk manager in policies ranging from limited liability and bank-

ruptcy law to social insurance and federal disaster relief. Moss has

also co-edited three books on economic regulation and has pub-

lished numerous articles, book chapters, and case studies on top-

ics ranging from economic policy and financial markets to

political institutions.

Professor Moss is the founder of the Tobin Project, a non-profit

research organization based in Cambridge, Massachusetts. He is

the recipient of numerous honors, including the Student

Association Faculty Award for outstanding teaching at Harvard

Business School and the American Risk and Insurance Association’s

Kulp-Wright Book Award for “the most influential text published

on the economics of risk management and insurance.”

About_the_Author.indd 211 19/05/14 11:35 PM

Page 223: A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics: What Managers, Executives, and Students Need to Know

About_the_Author.indd 212 19/05/14 11:35 PM